5008 (2011) - Car PEUGEOT - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL 5008 (2011) PEUGEOT

Handbook 5008

PEUGEOT 5008

PEUGEOT

Service Box

http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com

PEUGEOT's SERVICE BOX Internet site permits easy and free consultation of your vehicle documentation on line.

Simple and user friendly, SERVICE BOX allows you access:

• to your Handbook,
• to previous Vehicle documentation.

Your vehicle lives on the Internet!

Access the latest information available.

Connect to http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com:

select your language,
click on the link in the "Private customer access" zone to consult the Vehicle documentation,
A window opens giving access to all of the handbooks...

select your vehicle,
choose its body type then the date of publication of the handbook,
fi nally, click on the item which is of interest to you.

Please note the following point:

The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories which are not recommended by PEUGEOT may result in a failure of your vehicle's electronic system. Please note this specific warning. It is advisable to contact a PEUGEOT dealer to be shown the recommended equipment and accessories.

WELCOME

Thank you for choosing a 5008, a symbol of confidence, passion and inspiration.

This handbook has been designed to enable you to make the most of your 5008.

On the first few pages, you will find a detailed summary, followed by a quick reference guide intended to make it easier for you to become familiar with your vehicle.

All of the details specific to your 5008, comfort, safety, driving, are then presented in this handbook, to increase your appreciation of the vehicle and to help you make the most of it

At the end of the handbook, illustrations of the interior and exterior of the vehicle will assist you in locating equipment or a function by means of the page indexed.

Each model may only be fitted with some of the equipment mentioned in this handbook, depending on the trim level, model, version and the specification for the country in which it is sold.

Close-up of a black vehicle's rear taill with red LED light trail, number 5008 visible on the side (no other text or symbols)

Key

Warning:

this symbol marks warnings which it is essential to observe

for your own safety, for the safety of others or to avoid any risk of damaging your vehicle.

Information:

this symbol draws your attention to additional information for better use of your vehicle.

Protection of the environment:

this symbol accompanies advice relating to protection of the environment.

Page reference:

this symbol invites you to refer to the pages which provide details of the function.

CONTENTS

FAMILIARISATION 4-24

ECO-DRIVING 25-26

INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS 27-4 1

Instrument panels....27 Indicator and warning lamps....29 Indicators....37 Adjustment buttons....41

MULTIFUNCTION SCREENS 42-57

Screen A without audio equipment ... 42 Screen A with audio equipment 44 Screen C (Peugeot Connect Sound) 46 16/9 retractable cobur screen (Peugeot Connect Navigation (RNEG)) 49 16/9 high definition retractable colour screen (Peugeot Connect Media) ..... 51 Trip computer 54

COMFORT 58-75

Heating and Ventilation ....58 Manual air conditioning 60 Rear screen demist/defrosi 61 Dual-zone digital air conditioning 62 Front sea t 63 Rear seats, 2nd row 69 Access to the 3rd row /1 Rear seats, 3rd row /2 Seat modularly /3 Mirrors ....4 Steering wheel adjustment /5

ACCESS 76-90

Remote control key 76 Alarm 81 Electric windows 83 Doors 85 Booi 87 Fuel tank 89 Misfuel prevention 90

VISIBILITY 91-101

Lighting controls 91 Automatic illumination of headlamps....94 Headlamp adjustment 94 Directional lighting 95 Wiper controls 96 Automatic rain sensitive wipers 98 Courtesy lamps....99 Interior mood light trg 100

FITTINGS 102-115

Interior fittings....1C2 Centre console....104 Rear mu Itimedia....107 Panoramic sunroof....108 Boot fittings 5 seat version....1C9 Boot fittings 7 seat version....110

CHILD SAFETY 116-127

Child seats....116 ISOFIX child seats 123 Child lock 127

SAFETY 128-139

Direction indicators....128 Hazard warning lamps....128 Hom....128 Tyre under-inflation detection....129 ESC system....130 Front seat belts....132 Airbags....136

CONTENTS

DRIVING 140-170

Electric parking brake	140
Hill start assist	145
Head-up display	148
Distan ce alert	150
Speed limiter	152
Cruise control	154
Manual gearbox	156
Gear efficiency indicator	156
6-speed electronic gear control gearbox	157
Automatic gearbox	161
Stop & Start	164
Parking sensors	167
Parking space sensors	169

PRACTICAL INFORMATION

179-213

Temporary puncture repair kit....	179
Changing a wheel....	188
Changing a bulb....	194
Changing a fuse....	199
12 V Battery....	206
Energy economy mode....	208
Changing a wiper blade....	208
Towing the vehicle....	209
Towing a trailer....	2'0
Fitting roof bars....	211
Very cold climate screen....	2'2
Accessories....	2'3

AUDIO EQUIPMENT and TELEMATICS 223-32 4

Emergency or assistance	223
Peugeot Connect Media	221
Peugeot Connect Navigation (RNEG)	271
Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5)	303

ALPHABETICAL INDEX 325-329

CHECKS 171-178

Bonnet	172
Running out of fuel (Diesel)	173
Petrol engines	174
Diesel engines	175
Checking levels	176
Checks	177

TECHNICAL DATA

214-222

Petrol engines	2'4
Petrol weights	2'5
Diesel engines	2'6
Diesel weights	2'7
Dimensions	221
Identification markings	222

VISUAL SEARCH 330-334

EXTERIOR

Stop & Start

This system puts the engine temporarily into standby during stops in the traffic (red lights, traffic jams, etc...). The engine restarts automatically as soon as you want to move off. The Stop & Start system reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions and provides the comfort of complete silence when stationary

164

comfort of ry 164

Panoramic sunroof

This roof provides incomparable visibility and light in the passenger compartment.

108

Welcome lighting

This additional exterior and interior lighting, controlled remotely, makes your approach to the vehicle easier when the light is poor.

93

Directional lighting

This lighting automatically provides additional visibility when cornering.

95

EXTERIOR

Parking space sensor

This system measures the size of the parking space available between two vehicles or obstacles.

169

When washing your vehicle in a car wash:

• remove the aerial,
• fold back the mirrors.

Side view of a light blue minivan with visible rear wheel and side door (no text or symbols)

Temporary puncture repair kit

This kit is a complete system, consisting of a compressor and an integrated sealant product, for the temporary repair of a tyre.

179

Visual and audible front and/or rear parking sensors

This system warns you if an obstacle is detected behind or in front of the vehicle in reverse or forward gear.

167

OPENING

Remote control ke

Close-up of a black car key with a labeled pad and arrow indicating left-hand rule (no text or symbols on the main object)

A. Unfolding/Folding the key.

Normal locking
(press once; fi xed lighting of the direction indicators).

or

Deadlocking the vehicle
(press twice in succession; fi xed lighting of the direction indicators).

Complete or selective unlocking of the vehicle
(rapid fl ashing of the direction indicators).

76

Welcome lighting

Illustration of a light blue minivan with red accent highlights, set against a dark background (no text or symbols)

When the light is poor, detected by a sensor, the remote switching on of the dipped beam headlamps and sidelamps makes your approach to the vehicle easier.
This function can be programmed via the configuration menu.

93

Fuel tank

Diagram of a mechanical device with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating motion or assembly.

1. Opening the fuel filler flap.
2. Opening and hooking the fuel filler cap.
   Capacity of the tank: approximately 60 litres.

The type of fuel to be used is indicated on the inner face of the fuel filler flap.

89

On Diesel vehicles, the fuel fi ller neck incorporates a mis-fuel prevention device which prevents fi lling with petrol.

OPENING

Boot

Diagram showing a key inserted into a car's rear panel with labeled parts and an upward arrow indicating motion or adjustment.

1. Unlocking the vehicle.
2. Opening the boot.

87

108

Panoramic sunroof

Diagram showing a car interior with steering wheel and directional arrows, labeled with numbers 1 and 2.

1. Opening the blind.

Diagram showing a road intersection with directional arrows and numbered zones 1 and 2

1. Closing the blind.

INTERIOR

Head-up display

This system projects certain information into the fi eld of vision of the driver: speed, cruise control/speed limiter and Distance alert.

148

Electric parking brake

This combines the functions of automatic application on switching off the engine and automatic release on acceleration.

Manual application/release is possible.

140

nication systems s from the latest tech- le Peugeot Connect Connect USB, Blue- t Navigation (RNEG) Media Navigation table colour screen, liary sockets.

Audio and communication systems

This equipment benefits from the latest technology: MP3 compatible Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5), Peugeot Connect USB, Bluetooth, Peugeot Connect Navigation (RNEG) or Peugeot Connect Media Navigation (RT6) with 16/9 retractable colour screen, JBL audio system, auxiliary sockets.

Peugeot Connect

Media Navigation (RT6)

Peugeot Connect

Navigation (RNEG)

Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5)

227

271

Peugeot Connect USB

Bluetooth

PEUGEOT

Assistance

250,

310

255.

291

313

223

Dual-zone digital air conditioning

This system allows different levels of comfort to be set for the driver and front passenger. It then controls these levels automatically according to the ambient conditions.

62

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components for identification

1. Audio and telematics system steering mounted control stalk.
2. Steering lock and ignition.
3. Wipers/screenwash/trip computer control stalk.

4. Instrument panel.

5. Driver's airbag. Horn.

6. Gear lever.

7. Electric parking brake.

8. 12 V accessory socket.

9. Centre console.

10. Panoramic sunroof control.

11. Handbook storage compartment.

12. Manual headlamp adjustment.

Instrument panel navigator associated with the Peugeot Connect Media Navigation (RT6).

1. Alarm switch.

Parking sensors switch.

Dynamic stability control switch (ESP/ASR).

Stop & Start deactivation switch.

1. Door mirror controls.

Electric window controls. Child lock.

1. Front door window demist/defrost vent.

2. Windscreen demist/defrost vent.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components and a warning sign, likely for safety or diagnostic purposes.

1. Steering wheel adjustment.
2. Cruise control/speed limiter switches.
3. Lighting and direction indicator control stalk.
4. Central adjustable air vents.
5. Head-up display.
6. Multifunction screen.
7. Passenger's airbag.
8. Side adjustable air vent.
9. Glove box - Audio/video sockets - Passenger's airbag deactivation.
10. Bonnet release.
11. 12 V accessory socket.
12. Heating/air conditioning controls.
13. Audio and telematics system.
14. Switches:
15. head-up display,
16. hazard warning lamps,
17. Distance alert,
18. central locking.

SITTING COMFORTABLY

Driver's seat

65

66

SITTING COMFORTABLY

Front seats

Head restraint height and angle

Illustration of a 3D object with directional arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)

Lumbar

Diagram of a car interior showing a seat and a close-up of a spherical object with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Steering wheel adjustment

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    B --> C["3"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#dfd,stroke:#333

1. Releasing the adjustment mechanism.
2. Adjustment of height and reach.
3. Locking the adjustment mechanism.

As a safety precaution, these operations must only be carried out when stationary.

Centre console

Diagram of a device's front panel with arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols present)

This has a large storage area (with recesses for 2 bottles, ...) for the front passengers and, according to version, a multimedia system for the rear passengers.

104, 107

75

SITTING COMFORTABLY Door mirrors

A B C

Adjustment

A. Selection of the mirror to be adjusted.
B. Adjustment of the position of the mirror in the four directions.

Also...

C. Folding/Unfolding.

Rear view mirror

Diagram showing car rearview mirror with numbered arrows indicating direction of motion or change

Manual model

1. Selection of the "day" position of the mirror.

2. Adjustment of the mirror.

Diagram of a car frontview with directional arrows indicating movement or change (no text or symbols)

Automatic day/night model

1. Adjustment of the mirror.

Front seat belts

Close-up of a black cable or wire with a numbered marker (1) pointing to it, overlaid on a faint architectural line drawing (no text or symbols)

1. Fastening the buckle.

Diagram of a car seatbelt buckle with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

1. Height adjustment.

132

75

SEEING CLEARLY

Lighting

A B ID ID

A AUTO REOUI B

Ring A

Lighting off.

Automatic illumination of headlamps.

Sidelamps.

Dipped/main beam headlamps.

91

Ring B

Rear foglamp.

O

Front and rear foglamps.

92

Direction indicators

Diagram of a car's control panel with directional arrows and labeled buttons, showing vehicle status indicators.

Raise or lower the lighting stalk passing the point of resistance; the corresponding direction indicators will fl ash for as long as the stalk remains in this position.

"Motorway" function

Press the lighting stalk up or down once, without passing the point of resistance; the corresponding direction indicators will flash three times.

This function can be used at any speed, but it is particularly useful when changing lane on high-speed roads.

128

Wipers

A 0 AUTO A I + - 0

B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

Stalk A: windscreen wipers

Switching on "AUTO"

Press the stalk down and release it.

Switching off "AUTO"

Push the stalk up and return it to position "0".

98

Ring B: rear wiper

Park.

Intermittent wipe.

Wash-wipe.

97

VENTILATION

Recommended interior settings

I require...	Heating or Manual Air Conditioning
	Air distribution	Air flow	Air recirculation/Intake of outside air	Temperature	Manual A/C
HOT
COLD					ON
DEMISTINGDEFROSTING					ON

Digital air conditioning: we recommend use of the fully automatic mode by pressing the "AUTO" button.

MONITORING

Instrumentpanel

A B C 01 OK

A. With the ignition on, the needle should indicate the level of fuel remaining.

B. With the engine running, its associated low level warning lamp should go off.

C. With the ignition on, the oil level indicator should display "OIL OK" for a few seconds.

If the levels are not correct, top up the levels which are low.

Warning lamps

Two identical car dashboard gauges with digital displays and control buttons (no text or symbols visible)

1. With the ignition on, the orange and red warning lamps come on.

2. With the engine running, these warning lamps should go off.

If warning lamps remain on, refer to the page concerned.

29

27

Diagram showing car interior with labeled warning signs and a vehicle icon

Switch panels

Lower

Diagram showing a car dashboard with labeled buttons A through F, and a small inset image of the dashboard.

Lighting of the indicator lamp indicates the status of the corresponding function.

A. Parking space sensors.

B. Deactivation of Stop & Start.

169

165

C. Volumetric alarm.

D. Visual and audible parking sensors.

81

167

E. ESP OFF.

131

F. Child lock.

127

Central

Diagram of a car air conditioner panel with labeled buttons and indicators

G. Head-up display.

148

H. Hazard warning lamps.

128

I. Distance alert.

150

J. Central locking.

86

PASSENGER SAFETY

Passenger's front airbag

Diagram showing a car door panel with an inset highlighting a key switch mechanism labeled 1, 2, and 3.

1. Insert the key.
2. Select the position:

"OFF" (deactivation), with "rear facing" child seat,

"ON" (activation), with front passenger or "forwards facing" child seat.

1. Remove the key keeping the switch in the new position.

137

Seat belts and passenger's front airbag

graph TD
    A["A"] --> B["B"]
    B --> C["C"]
    C --> D["D"]
    D --> E["E"]
    E --> F["F"]
    F --> G["J"]
    G --> H["No Noise"]
    H --> I["H"]
    I --> J["G"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

A. Front and/or rear seat belts not fas- Lighting of the indicator lamp indicates the tened/unfastened warning lamp. status of the corresponding function.

B. Front left seat belt warning lamp.
C. Front right seat belt warning lamp.
D. Rear right seat belt warning lamp.
E. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp.
F. Rear left seat belt warning lamp.

G. Passenger's front airbag deactivated warning lamp.

H. Passenger's front airbag activated warning lamp.

133

7 seat version (3rd row)

I. Rear right seat belt warning lamp.
J. Rear left seat belt warning lamp.

127

ARRANGING YOUR SEATS

Foldinthe seats in the 2nd row

Diagram showing car seat assembly with labeled parts A and B, including directional arrows indicating movement or positioning.

Pull the strap A upwards firmly to release the seat and continue to pull until the seat is fully folded.

From the boot

Pull the strap B to release the seat and push the seat back forwards gently.

Putting the seats back in place

3D diagram of a car interior showing a vehicle chassis with a highlighted component and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Raise the seat back and push it rearwards until it locks.

Rigid panel

Mechanical component diagram showing a bracket with arrows indicating motion or movement (no text or symbols present)

After folding the seats, slide the catch C.

7 SEAT VERSION

Access to the 3rd row seats

Diagram showing two car seatbelting scenarios with directional arrows and labeled component 'D'

Close the aircraft style tables on the 2 nd row seats if they are open.

Hold the control D up, the seat is released and the seat base rises to the seat back.

Push the seat back forwards, holding the control D forwards.

71 70

71

ARRANGING YOUR SEATS (7 SEAT VERSION)

Changing from 5 to 7 seats

Changing from 7 to 5 seats

Interior view of a car showing three panels with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols present)

Diagram of a vehicle rearview structure with a highlighted component and arrow (no text or symbols)

Place the rigid panels of the 2nd row seats upright and lock them then fold the concertina boards rearwards.
Remove the load space cover and store it in its housing.

Two technical diagrams showing a vehicle interior with a labeled component (E) and a highlighted section with an arrow, no readable text or symbols present.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a bracket with a directional arrow, no visible text or symbols

Pull the strap E and guide the seat until the assembly locks.
Fold the concertina boards forwards.

Interior view of a car seat assembly with hand placement and directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Interior view of a car backseat with a horizontal bar and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Lower the head restraints and place the concertina board in the vertical position behind the seat.
While pulling the strap F, push the seat back forwards gently.
Remove the load space screen from its storage compartment and position it behind the 2 nd row seats.

72, 111

72, 111

DRIVING SAFELY

Stp & Start

Going into engine STOP mode

The "ECO" warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and the engine automatically goes into standby, with a 6-speed electronic gear control gearbox: at speeds below 5 mph (8 km/h), press the brake pedal or put the gear lever in position N.

In some circumstances, STOP mode may not be available; the "ECO" warning lamp fl ashes for few seconds, then goes off.

Going into engine START mode

The "ECO" warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts with a 6-speed electronic gear control gearbox :

• gear lever in position A or M, release the brake pedal,
• or with the gear lever in position N and the brake pedal released, move the gear lever to position A or M,
• or engage reverse gear.

In some circumstances START mode may be invoked automatically; the "ECO" warning lamp flashes for a few seconds, then goes off.

ECO OFF

Deactivation/Reactivation

You can deactivate the system at any time by pressing the "ECO OFF" button; the warning lamp in the button comes on.

The system is reactivated automatically at every new start using the key.

Before refuelling or doing anything under the bonnet, you must switch off the ignition using the key.

165

DRIVING SAFELY

Electric parking brake

Diagram of a car gear shift lever with labeled component 'A' (no text or symbols beyond label)

Manual application/release

The parking brake can be applied manually by pulling the control lever A. When the ignition is on, the parking brake can be released manually by pressing the brake pedal and pulling then releasing the control lever A.

Diagram showing a car interior with directional arrows indicating movement or rotation (no text or labels)

Automatic application/release

Press the accelerator, press and and release the clutch (manual gearbox), the parking brake is released automatically and progressively on acceleration.

With the vehicle stationary, when the engine is switched off, the parking brake is applied automatically.

3000 m x 1000 50 9

Before getting out of the vehicle, check that the braking warning lamp (red!) and the warning

lamp P, located in the control lever A are on fixed (not flashing).

If this warning lamp is on in the instrument panel, the automatic application/release is deactivated, in this case use the manual application/release.

When the door is opened with the engine running an audible signal is heard, apply the parking brake manually.

Do not leave a child alone in the vehicle with the ignition on, they could release the parking brake.

If you are towing a trailer or a caravan or if the gradient is likely to change (transport by ship, lorry, towing, ...), ap-e parking brake manually to turn force (long pull on control A) to immobilise the vehicle.

140

DRIVING SAFELY

Hill start assist

Two identical blue minivans on a road, shown from top and bottom angles with motion arrows (no text or symbols)

Your vehicle is equipped with a system which keeps it immobile for a short time (approximately 2 seconds) to assist you when starting on a hill, the time required for you to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.

This system only operates:

• when the vehicle has been completely stopped with your foot on the brake pedal,
• on certain gradients,
• when the driver's door is closed.

Do not get out of the vehicle during the hill start assist temporary holding phase.

145

Head-up display

Diagram showing computer setup with monitor, keyboard, and drive unit, alongside three labeled icons (1, 2, 3) for UI control.

1. Head-up display on/off.
2. Brightness adjustment.
3. Display height adjustment.

148

Hand holding a white block with a red X mark, over a dark surface (no text or symbols)

Abstract graphic with a black arrow pointing to a circular icon labeled '1' (no text or symbols present)

Distance alert

Diagram illustrating vehicle navigation and steering wheel control system with labeled components

1. Distance alert on/off.
2. Alert value increase/decrease.

150

The adjustments must be made with the engine running and the vehicle stationary.

DRIVING SAFELY

Speed limiter "LIMIT"

Diagram showing a car interior with numbered components and directional arrows, likely illustrating vehicle positioning or navigation.

1. Limiter mode Selection/Off.
2. Decrease the programmed value.
3. Increase the programmed value.
4. Speed limiter On/Off.

The values must be set with the engine running.

152

Cruise control "CRUBE"

Diagram showing a car interior with numbered components and directional arrows, likely illustrating vehicle movement or navigation.

1. Cruise control mode Selection/Off.
2. Programme a speed/Decrease the programmed value.
3. Programme a speed/Increase the programmed value.
4. Cruise control Off/Resume.

In order to be programmed or activated, the vehicle speed must be higher than 25 mph (40 km/h), with at least fourth gear engaged on the manual gearbox (second gear for the 6-speed electronic gear control gearbox or automatic gearbox).

Display in the instrument panel

Limit PAUSE 55°

LIMIT 66° #PAUSE

k=1 56

The cruise control or speed limiter mode appears on the instrument panel when it is selected.

Cruise control

Speed limiter

154

DRIVING SAFELY

6-speed electronic gear control gearbox

This 6-speed electronic gear control gearbox offers a choice between the comfort of fully automatic operation or the pleasure of manual gear changing.

1 + - R N A 2 S

1. Gear lever.

2. Button "S" (sport).

Diagram of a car steering wheel with numbered labels pointing to key components

1. Steering mounted "-" paddle.

2. Steering mounted "+" paddle.

Moving off

Select position N and press the brake pedal firmly while starting the engine.
Engage first gear (position A or M) or reverse (position R) using the gear lever 1.
Take your foot off the brake pedal then accelerate.

"Porsche Tiptronic System" automatic gearbox

Diagram showing a mechanical assembly with numbered components, likely illustrating a turning or disassembly process.

This six-speed gearbox offers a choice between the comfort of fully automatic operation or the pleasure of manual gear changing.

1. Gear lever.
2. Button "S" (sport).
3. Button "⊗" (snow).

Moving off

Select position P or N and press the brake pedal firmly while starting the engine.
Select position R, D or M.
Take your foot off the brake pedal, then accelerate.

157

161

ECO-DRIVING

Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO_2 emissions.

Optimise the use of your gearbox

With a manual gearbox, move off gently, change up without waiting and drive by changing up quite soon. If your vehicle has the system, the gear effi ciency indicator invites you to change up; it is displayed in the instrument panel, follow its instructions.

With an automatic or electronic gearbox, stay in Drive "D" or Auto "A", according to the type of gearbox, without pressing the accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly.

Drive smoothly

Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use engine braking rather than the brake pedal, and press the accelerator progressively. These practices contribute towards a reduction in fuel consumption and CO_2 emissions and also helps reduce the background traffic noise.

If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of the system at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is flowing well.

Control the use of your electrical equipment

Before moving off, if the passenger compartment is too warm, ventilate it by opening the windows and air vents before using the air conditioning.

Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the windows and leave the air vents open.

Remember to make use of equipment that can help keep the temperature in the passenger compartment down (sun roof and window blinds...).

Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has automatic digital regulation, as soon as the desired temperature is attained.

Switch off the demisting and defrosting controls, if not automatic.

Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible.

Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps when the level of light does not require their use.

Avoid running the engine before moving off, particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm up much faster while driving.

As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your multimedia devices (fi lm, music, video game...), you will contribute towards limiting the consumption of electrical energy, and so of fuel.

Disconnect your portable devices before leaving the vehicle.

Limit the causes of excess consumption

Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the heaviest items in the bottom of the boot, as close as possible to the rear seats.

Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and reduce wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use a roof box in preference.

Remove roof bars and roof racks after use.

Observe the recommendations on maintenance

Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, referring to the label in the door aperture, driver's side.

Carry out this check in particular:

- before a long journey,

- at each change of season, - after a long period out of use.

Don't forget the spare wheel and the tyres on any trailer or caravan.

When refuelling, do not continue after the 3 rd cut-off of the nozzle to avoid any overflow.

At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only after the first 1 800 miles (3 000 kilometres) that you will see the fuel consumption settle down to a consistent average.

At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refi t your summer tyres.

Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine oil, oil filter, air filter...) and observe the schedule of operations recommended by the manufacturer.

INSTRUMENT PANELS

Automotive dashboard display showing speedometer, navigation controls, and diagnostic interface with Chinese labels

Panel grouping together the vehicle operation indication dials and warning lamps.

Dials

1. Rev counter. Indicates the engine speed (x 1 000 rpm).
2. Coolant temperature. Indicates the temperature of the engine coolant (° Celsius).
3. Fuel level. Indicates the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
4. Speedometer. Indicates the current speed of the moving vehicle (mph or km/h).
5. Screen.
6. Display zero reset or service indicator re-display button. Resets the selected function to zero (trip distance recorder or service indicator) or displays the service indicator again.
7. Instrument panel lighting dimmer. Adjusts the brightness of the lighting of the instruments and controls, if the vehicle lighting is on.

For more information, refer to the paragraph relating to the button or function and its associated display.

Screen(s)

A LIMIT CRUISE AUTO PAUSE ON -88.0006 B S miles Km 88.0008 C D

A Cruse Pause 65° M 7 60° E D B 10228.s 10228 s C

A. Speed limiter

or

Cruise control. (mph or km/h)

B. Trip distance recorder. (miles or km)

C. Service indicator.

(miles or km) or, Engine oil level indicator.

or

distance recorder.

(miles or km)

D. 6-speed electronic gear control or automatic gearbox.
E. Warning messages and function status messages, trip computer, GPS navigation information, menus (with Peugeot Connect Media).

Instrument panel navigator associated with the Peugeot Connect Media

Limit PAUSE 56 mph 500 mph 10,2 mpg

This group of buttons permits:

• when stationary, configuration of the vehicle's equipment and the screen settings (languages, units...),
• while driving, scrolling of the active functions (trip computer, navigation...).

Diagram showing a rotary dial with numbered positions and a vehicle schematic view

Controls

There are four buttons to control the large 16/9 screen in the instrument panel:

1. access the main menu, confirm the selection,
2. move up through the menu,
3. move down through the menu,
4. return to the previous display, exit from the menu.

The main menu and its associated functions can only be accessed when stationary, via buttons 1 to 4.

A message appears on the screen, above a certain speed threshold, indicating that the main menu cannot be displayed.

The trip computer displays can only be accessed while driving, via buttons 2 and 3 (refer to the "Trip computer" paragraph).

Main menu

Press button 1 for access to the main menu and select one of the following functions:
- "Vehicle parameters",
- "Choice of language",
- "Choice of units".
Press button 2 or 3 to move in the screen.
Press button 1 again to confirm the selection.

Vehicle parameters

Main menu Vehicule parameters Choice of language Choice of units ESC

This menu allows you to activate or deactivate certain driving and comfort equipment (according to country):

• wiper linked with reverse gear (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• selective unlocking (refer to the "Access" section),
• guide-me-home and welcome lighting (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• interior mood lighting (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• daytime running lamps (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• directional headlamps (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• automatic or manual parking brake (refer to the "Driving" section).

Choice of language

This menu allows you to select the display language: Deutsch, English, Espanol, Français, Italiano, Nederlands, Portugues, Türkçe *.

Choice of units

This menu allows you to select the units: temperature (°Celsius or °Fahrenheit) and fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).

Indicator and warning lamps

Visual indicators informing the driver that a system is in operation (operation or deactivation indicator lamps) or of the occurrence of a fault (warning lamp).

When the ignition is switched on

Certain warning lamps come on for a few seconds when the vehicle's ignition is switched on.

When the engine is started, these same warning lamps should go off.

If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the information on the warning lamp concerned.

Associated warnings

The illumination of certain warning lamps may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen.

The warning lamps may come on continuously (fixed) or flash.

Certain warning lamps may come on in two different modes. Only by relating the type of illumination to the operating status of the vehicle can it be ascertained whether the situation is normal or whether a fault has occurred.

Operation indicator lamps

If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has come into operation.

Warning lamp		is on	Cause	Action/Observations
	Left-hand direction indicator	fl ashing with buzzer.	The lighting stalk is pushed down.
	Right-hand direction indicator	fl ashing with buzzer.	The lighting stalk is pushed up.
	Sidelamps	fixed.	The lighting stalk is in the "Sidelamps" position.
	Dipped beam headlamps	fi xed.	The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped beam headlamps" position.
	Main beam headlamps	fi xed.	The lighting stalk is pulled towards you.	Pull the stalk to return to dipped beam headlamps.
	Front foglamps	fi xed.	The front foglamps are switched on.	Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards twice to switch off the front foglamps.
	Rear foglamps	fi xed.	The rear foglamps are switched on.	Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards to switch off the rear foglamps.
	Diesel engine pre-heating	fi xed.	The ignition switch is at the 2nd position (ignition on).	Wait until the warning lamp has switched off before starting. The duration for which the warning lamp is on is determined by the climatic conditions.
	Electric parking brake	fi xed.	The electric parking brake is applied.	Release the electric parking brake to switch off the warning lamp: with your foot on the brake pedal, pull the electric brake control. Observe the safety recommendations. For more information on the electric parking brake, refer to the "Driving" section.
AUTO(P)OFF	Deactivation of the automatic functions of the electric parking brake	fi xed.	The "automatic application" (on switching off the engine) and "automatic release" functions are deactivated or faulty.	Activate the function (according to country) via the vehicle confi guration menu or contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop.
(○)	Foot on the brake pedal	fi xed.	The brake pedal must be pressed.	Press the brake pedal to start the engine with the 6-speed electronic gear control gearbox (lever in position N ) or automatic gearbox (lever in position P ).If you wish to release the parking brake without pressing the brake pedal, this warning lamp will remain on.
		fl ashing.	In the case of an electronic gear control gearbox, if you hold the vehicle on an incline using the accelerator for too long, the clutch overheats.	Use the brake pedal and/or the electric parking brake.
>P>	Parking space sensors	fi xed.	The parking space sensors function is active.	Press the corresponding button to deactivate it.
		fl ashing.	The system is measuring the space.	Once the measurement has been done, the warning lamp comes on fi xed again.
ECO	Stop & Start	fi xed.	When the vehicle stops (red lights, traffi c jams, ...) the Stop & Start system has put the engine into STOP mode.	The warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts automatically in START mode, as soon as you want to move off.
		fl ashes for a few seconds, then goes off.	STOP mode is temporarily unavailable.orSTART mode is invoked automatically.	Refer to "Driving - § Stop & Start" for special cases with STOP mode and START mode.

Deactivation indicator lamps

If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally. This is may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message on the multifunction screen.

Warning lamp		is on	Cause	Action/Observations
	Passenger's airbag system	fixed.	The control, located in the glove box, is set to the OFF position.The passenger's front airbag is deactivated.In this case you can install a "rear facing" child seat.	Set the control to the ON position to activate the passenger's front airbag.In this case, do not fit a child seat in the rear-facing position.
	ESP/ASR	fixed.	The button, located at the bottom right of the dashboard, is pressed. Its indicator lamp is on.The ESP/ASR is deactivated. ESP: electronic stability programme.ASR: anti-skid regulation.	Press the button to activate the ESP/ASR. Its indicator lamp switches off.The ESP/ASR system is activated automatically when the vehicle is started.If it has been deactivated, the system is reactivated automatically from approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).

Warning lamps

When the engine is running or the vehicle is being driven, the illumination of one of the following warning lamps indicates a fault which requires action on the part of the driver.

Any fault resulting in the illumination of a warning lamp must be investigated further by reading the associated message in the multifunction screen.

If you encounter any problems, do not hesitate to contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Warning lamp		is on	Cause	Action/Observations
STOP	STOP	fi xed, alone or associated with another warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen.	Illumination of this warning lamp is associated with a serious braking system, power steering, engine lubrication or cooling system malfunction or a punctured tyre.	Stop as soon as it is safe to do so as there is a risk that the engine will cut out while driving.Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop.
	Service	on temporarily.	A minor fault has occurred for which there is no specifi c warning lamp.	Identify the fault by reading the message shown in the screen, such as, for example:- the closing of the doors, boot or bonnet,- the engine oil level,- the screenwash level,- the remote control battery,- the tyre pressures,- saturation of the particle emission fi Iter (Diesel).- ...For any other faults, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop.
		fi xed.	A major fault has occurred for which there is no specifi c warning lamp.	Identify the fault by reading the message shown on the screen and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop.
	(PEF: particle emissions fi Iter, Diesel)	fi xed, associated temporarily with a message on the risk of blockage of the PEF.	This indicates the start of saturation of the particle emissions fi Iter.	As soon as traffic conditions allow, regenerate the fi Iter by driving at a speed of at least 35 mph (60 km/h) until the service warning lamp goes off.
		fi xed.	This indicates the low level in the Diesel additive reservoir.	Have the level topped up by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop as soon as possible.
	Electric parking brake	fl ashing.	The application or release of the electric parking brake was interrupted.	You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Park on level ground, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop.
	Electric +parking brake malfunction	fi xed.	The electric parking brake has a fault.	Automatic application/release is no longer possible.Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop without delay.The parking brake can be released manually using the emergency release procedure.For more information on the electric parking brake, refer to the "Driving" section.
	Braking	fi xed, associated with the STOP warning lamp.	The braking system fl uid level has dropped signifi cantly.	You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.Top up with brake fl uid recommended by PEUGEOT.If the problem persists, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop.
		fi xed, associated with the electric parking brake malfunction warning lamp, if the parking brake is released.	The braking system has a fault.	You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop.
		fi xed, associated with the STOP and ABS warning lamps.	The electronic brake force distribution (EBFD) system has a fault.	You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop.
	Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)	fi xed.	The anti-lock braking system has a fault.	The vehicle retains conventional braking.Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop without delay.
	Dynamic stability control (ESP/ASR)	fl ashing.	The ESP/ASR regulation is active.	The system optimises traction and improves the directional stability of the vehicle.
		fi xed.	Unless it has been deactivated (button pressed and its indicator lamp on) the ESP/ASR system has a fault.	Have it checked by a PEUGEOT or a qualifi ed workshop.
	Engine autodiagnosis system	fi xed.	The emission control system has a fault.	The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualifi ed workshop without delay.
		fl ashing.	The engine management system has a fault.	Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop.
	Low fuel level	fi xed with the needle in the red zone.	When it fi rst comes on there remains approximately 6 litres of fuel in the tank.At this point, you begin to use the fuel reserve.	Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of fuel.This warning lamp will come on every time the ignition is switched on, until a suffi cient addition of fuel is made.Fuel tank capacity: approximately 60 litres.Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel, as this could damage the emission control and injection systems.
	Maximum coolant temperature	fi xed with the needle in the red zone.	The temperature of the cooling system is too high.	Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.Wait until the engine has cooled down before topping up the level, if necessary.If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop.
	Engine oil pressure	fi xed.	There is a fault with the engine lubrication system.	You must stop as soon it is safe to do so.Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop.
	Battery charge	fi xed.	The battery charging circuit has a fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack or cut alternator belt, ...).	The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop.
	Door(s) open	fi xed if the speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h).	A door, the boot, the lower tailgate or the bonnet (with alarm only) is still open.	Close the door or boot.
		fi xed and accompanied by an audible signal if the speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).
	Front seat belt not fastened/ unfastened	fixed then flashing accompanied by an increasing audible signal.	The driver and/or the front passenger has not fastened or has unfastened their seat belt.	Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle.
	Rear seat belt not fastened/ unfastened	fixed then flashing accompanied by an audible signal.	One or more rear passengers have unfastened their seat belt.
	Airbags	on temporarily.	This lamp comes on for a few seconds when you turn on the ignition, then goes off.	This lamp should go off when the engine is started.If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop.
		fi xed.	One of the airbag or seat belt pretensioner systems has a fault.	Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop.
	Water In Diesel	fi xed.	The Diesel fuel fi liter contains water.	Risk of damage to the injection system on Diesel engines.Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop without delay.
	Directional headlamps	fl ashing.	The directional headlamps system has a fault.	Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop.
	Under-infl ated tyre	fi xed.	The pressure in one or more wheels is too low.	Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible.This check should preferably be carried out when the tyres are cold.

Coolant temperature indicator

A 70 90 B STOP 1

With the engine running, when the needle is:

• in zone A, the temperature is correct,
• in zone B, the temperature is too high; the max temperature warning lamp 1 and the central STOP warning lamp come on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen.

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

Wait a few minutes before switching off the engine.

Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

After driving for a few minutes, the temperature and pressure in the cooling system increase.

To top up the level:

wait for the engine to cool,
unscrew the cap by two turns to allow the pressure to drop,
when the pressure has dropped, remove the cap,
top up the level to the "MAX" mark.

Service indicator

System which informs the driver when the next service is due, in accordance with the manufacturer's servicing schedule.

The point at which the service is due is calculated from the last indicator zero reset. It is determined by two parameters:

• the distance travelled,
• the time elapsed since the last service.

2896 miles 25 136

Noise dB Audio Level dB/100mm

More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain before the next service is due

When the ignition is switched on, no service information appears in the screen.

Between 600 miles (1 000 km) and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain before the next service is due

For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner symbolising the service operations comes on. The distance recorder display line indicates the distance remaining before the next service is due.

Example: 1 700 miles (2 800 km) remain before the next service is due.

For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the screen indicates:

5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner goes off; the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The screen then indicates the total and trip distances.

Less than 600 miles (1 000 km) remain before the next service is due

Example: 400 miles (900 km) remain before the next service is due.

For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the screen indicates:

5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The spanner remains on to indicate that a service must be carried out soon.

Service overdue

For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner flashes to indicate that the service must be carried out as soon as possible.

Example: the service is overdue by 180 miles (300 km).

For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the screen indicates:

5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The spanner remains on.

The distance remaining may be weighted by the time factor, depending on the driving ons.

Therefore, the spanner may also come on if you have exceeded the two year service interval.

Service indicator zero reset

-0 /000

After each service, the service indicator must be reset to zero.

The procedure for resetting to zero is as follows:

switch off the ignition,

press and hold the trip distance recorder zero reset button,

F switch on the ignition; the distance recorder display begins a count-down,

when the display indicates "=0", release the button; the spanner disappears.

Following this operation, if you wish to disconnect the battery, lock the vehicle and wait at i ve minutes for the zero reset taken into account.

Retrieving the service information

You can access the service information at any time.

Press the trip distance recorder zero reset button.

The service information is displayed for a few seconds, then disappears.

Engine oil level indicator

System which informs the driver whether the engine oil level is correct or not.

oil ok

This information is indicated for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, after the service information.

The level shown will only be correct if the vehicle is on level ground and the engine has been off for more than 30 minutes.

Oil level correct

Oil level low

This is indicated by the flashing of "OIL", linked with the service warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen. If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using the dipstick, the level must be topped up to prevent damage to the engine.

Oil level indicator fault

This is indicated by the flashing of "OIL --". Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Dipstick

Refer to the "Checks" section to locate the dipstick and the oil filler cap on your engine.

There are 2 marks on the dipstick:

• A = max; never exceed this level (risk of damage to the engine),
• B = min; top up the level via the oil fler cap, using the grade of oil suited to your engine.

Total distance recorder

System which measures the total distance travelled by the vehicle during its life.

308.8 miles 200.8 /000

The total and trip distances are displayed for thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off, when the driver's door is opened and when the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

Trip distance recorder

System which measures a distance travelled during a day or other period since it was reset to zero by the driver.

With the ignition on, press the button until zeros appear.

In order to observe legislation, change the units of distance (miles or km) to those for the country you are passing through, using the configuration menu.

Lighting dimmer

System for manual adjustment of the brightness of the instrument panel in relation to the exterior brightness.

Camera menu interface showing playback controls and a green downward arrow indicating action

Activation

When the vehicle lighting is on:

press the button to change the brightness of the instrument panel,

when the lighting reaches the minimum setting, release the button, then press again to increase it,

or

When the lighting reaches the maximum setting, release the button, then press again to reduce it,

when the lighting reaches the level of brightness required, release the button.

When the vehicle lighting is on, you cannot switch the instrument panel lighting off but you can adjust it to minimum.

Deactivation

When the lighting is off, or in day mode on vehicles fitted with daytime running lamps, pressing the button does not have any effect.

MONOCHROME SCREENA (WITHOUT AUDIO EQUIPMENT)

RISC 1:17 20th METHU 27 MAY 2011 CM

Displays on the screen

This displays the following information:

- time,

- date,

- ambient temperature* (this flashes if there is a risk of ice),

- status of the openings (doors, boot, ...),

- trip computer (refer to the end of the section).

Warning messages (e.g.: "Emission control system faulty") or information messages (e.g.: "Boot open") may appear temporarily. Some can be cleared by pressing the "ESC" button.

Controls

ESC MENU OK 1:17 27 MP

There are three display control buttons:

- "ESC" to abandon the operation in progress,

- "MENU" to scroll through the menus or sub-menus,

- "OK" to select the menu or sub-menu required.

Main menu

[ MENU ] VEHICLE CONFIG

Press the "MENU" button to scroll through the various menus of the main menu:

- vehicle configuration,

- options,

- display settings,

- languages,

- units.

Press the "OK" button to select the menu required.

ESC MENU OK 1:17 27 MF

Vehicle confi guration

[ MENU ] REV WIPE ACT

Once the "Vehicle configuration" menu has been selected, you can activate or deactivate the following equipment (according to country):

• wiper linked with reverse gear (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• selective unlocking (refer to the "Access" section),
• "guide-me-home" and welcome lighting (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• interior mood lighting (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• daytime running lamps (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• directional headlamps (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• automatic or manual parking brake (refer to the "Driving" section),

Options

Once the "Options" menu has been selected, you can start diagnostics of the status of the equipment (active, not active, faulty).

Display settings

Once the "Display settings" menu has been selected, you can gain access to the following settings:

• year,
• month,
  -day,
• hour,
• minutes,
• 12 or 24 hour mode.

[ MENU ] YEAR

Once you have selected a setting, press the "OK" button to change its value.

C MENU 20 10

Wait for approximately ten seconds without any action to allow the changed data to be recorded or press the "ESC" button to cancel.

The screen then returns to the normal display.

Languages

Once the "Languages" menu has been selected, you can change the language used by the display (Français, Italiano, Nederlands, Portugues, Portugues-Brasil, Türkçe, Deutsch, English, Espanol).

Units

Once the "Units" menu has been selected, you can change the units for:

• temperature (°C or °F),
• fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).

For safety reasons, configuration of the multifunction screen by the driver must only be done when stationary.

MONOCHROME SCREEN A (WITH AUDIO EQUIPMENT)

1:17 20° 27 MAY 2009 L3 M5# 18 TWAT

Displays on the screen

This displays the following information:

- time,

- date,

- ambient temperature* (this flashes if there is a risk of ice).

- status of the openings (doors, boot, ...),

- audio sources (radio, CD, ...),

- trip computer (refer to the end of the section).

Warning messages (e.g.: "Emission control system faulty") or information messages (e.g.: "Boot open") may appear temporarily. Some can be cleared by pressing the "ESC" button.

* With air conditioning only.

Controls

TAI FTY MODE DARK ESC OK MENU

From the audio equipment control panel, you can:

press the "MENU" button to gain access to the main menu,

press the "▲" or "▼" buttons to scroll through the items on the screen,

press the "MODE" button to change the permanent application (trip computer, audio source, ...),

press the "◀" or "▶" buttons to change a setting value,

press the "OK" button to confirm,

or press the "ESC" button to abandon the operation in progress.

Main menu

[ MENU ] VEHICLE CONFIG

Press the "MENU" button for access to the main menu, then press the "▲" or "▼" buttons to scroll through the various menus:

- radio-CD,

- vehicle configuration,

- options,

- display settings,

- languages,

- units.

Press the "OK" button to select the menu required.

Radio-CD

With the audio equipment switched on, once the "Radio-CD" menu has been selected you can activate or deactivate the functions linked with use of the radio (RDS, REG), the CD or the CD changer (introscan, shuffle, CD repeat).

For more information on the "Radio-CD" application, refer to the "Audio and Telematics" section.

TAI PTY MODE DARK ESC MENU OK

Vehicle confi guration

[ MENU ] REV WIPE ACT

Once the "Vehicle Configuration" menu has been selected, you can activate or deactivate the following equipment (according to country):

- wiper linked with reverse gear (refer to the "Visibility" section).

• selective unlocking (refer to the "Access" section).
• guide-me-home and welcome lighting (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• interior mood lighting (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• daytime running lamps (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• directional headlamps (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• automatic or manual parking brake (refer to the "Driving" section),

- ...

Options

Once the "Options" menu has been selected, you can start diagnostics of the status of the equipment (active, not active, faulty).

Display settings

Once the "Display settings" menu has been selected, you can gain access to the following settings:

• year,
• month,
  -day,
• hour,
• minutes,
• 12 or 24 hour mode.

[ MENU ] YEAR

Once you have selected a setting, press the "◀" or "▶" buttons to change its value.

[ MENU ] 20:10

Press the "▲" or "▼" buttons to switch respectively to the previous or next setting.
Press the "OK" button to record the change and return to the normal display or press the "ESC" button to cancel.

Languages

Once the "Languages" menu has been selected, you can change the language used by the display (Français, Italiano, Nederlands, Portugues, Portugues-Brasil, Türkçe, Deutsch, English, Espanol).

Units

Once the "Units" menu has been selected, you can change the units of the following parameters:

• temperature (°C or °F),
• fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).

For safety reasons, configuration of the multifunction screen by the driver must only be done when stationary.

MONOCHROME SCREEN C (WITH PEUGEOT CONNECT SOUND)

11:32 Tue 22/03/2011 FHT RTL Phone 1 104.5 RBS EN FHS LXXX

Displays in the screen

This displays the following information:

- time,

- date,

- ambient temperature* (this flashes if there is a risk of ice),

- status of the openings (doors, boot...),

- audio sources (radio, CD...),

- trip computer (refer to the end of the section).

Warning messages (e.g.: "Emission control system faulty") or information messages (e.g.: "Automatic headlamp lighting activated") may appear temporarily. These can be cleared by pressing the "ESC" button.

Controls

TAI PTY MODE DARK ESC MENU OK

From the audio equipment control panel, you can:

press the "MENU" button for access to the main menu,
press the "▲" or "▼" buttons to scroll through the items on the screen,
press the "MODE" button to change the permanent application (trip computer, audio source...),
press the "◀" or "▶" buttons to change a setting value,
press the "OK" button to confirm, or
press the "ESC" button to abandon the operation in progress.

Main menu

Personalisation-Configuration

Press the "MENU" button for access to the main menu:

• audio functions,
• trip computer (refer to the end of the section),
• personalisation-configuration,
• telephone (Bluetooth system).

Press the "▲" or "▼" button to select the menu required, then confirm by pressing the "OK" button.

"Audio functions" menu

With the audio equipment switched on, once this menu has been selected you can activate or deactivate the functions linked with use of the radio (RDS, REG, RadioText) or the CD or CD changer (introscan, shuffle, CD repeat).

For more information on the "Audio functions" application, refer to the Peugeot Connect Sound part of the "Audio and Telematics" section.

TA/PTV MODE DARK ESC MENU OK

"Tp computer" menu

Once this menu has been selected, you can consult information concerning the status of the vehicle (alert log, status of the functions...).

Alert log

This summarises the active warning messages, displaying them in succession in the multifunction screen

Status of functions

This summarises the active or inactive status of the functions present on the vehicle.

Enter the distance to the destination

This allows you to enter an approximate value for the distance to the final destination.

Press the "MENU" button to gain access to the general menu.
Press the arrows, then the "OK" button to select the "Trip computer" menu.

Trip computer

On the "Trip computer" menu, select one of the following applications:

Trip computer Enter distance to destination Alert log Status of functions

"Personalisation-Configuration" menu

Personalisation-configuration Define the vehicle parameters Display configuration Choice of language Ⓞ Ⓡ ⏻ ⏻ Ⓜ

Once this menu has been selected, you can gain access to the following functions:

• defi ne the vehicle parameters,
• display configuration,
• choice of language.

Defi ne the vehicle parameters

Once this menu has been selected, you can activate or deactivate the following equipment (according to country):

• wiper linked with reverse gear (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• selective unlocking (refer to the "Access" section),
• guide-me-home lighting (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• interior mood lighting (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• daytime running lamps (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• directional headlamps (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• automatic or manual parking brake (refer to the "Driving" section),
• ...

TAI/PTV MODE DARK ESC OK MENU

Example: setting of the duration of the guide-me-home lighting.

Press the "▲" or "▼" buttons, then the "OK" button to select the menu required.

Define the vehicle parameters Access to the vehicle Screen wipe function Lighting and signalling

Press the "▲" or "▼" buttons, then the "OK" button to select the "Guide-me-home headlamps" line.

Lighting an signalling guide-me-home headlamps 50 s OK

Press the "◀" or "▶" buttons to set the value required (15, 30 or 60 seconds), then press the "OK" button to confirm.

Lighting an signalling ✓ Guide-me-home headlamps 60

Press the "▲" or "▼" buttons, then the "OK" button to select the "OK" box and confirm or press the "ESC" button to cancel.

Display configuration

Once this menu has been selected, you have access to the following settings:

• brightness-video setting,
• date and time setting,
• selection of the units.

Choice of language

Once this menu has been selected, you can change the screen display language (Deutsch, English, Espanol, Français, Italiano, Nederlands, Portugues, Portugues-Brasil, Türkçe *).

* According to country.

"Telephone" menu

With the audio equipment switched on, once this menu has been selected you can configure your Bluetooth hands-free kit (pairing), consult the various telephone directories (calls log, services...) and manage your communications (pick up, hang up, call waiting, secret mode...).

For more information on the "Telephone" application, refer to the Peugeot Connect Sound part of the "Audio and Telematics" section.

For safety reasons, configuration of the multifunction screen by the driver must only be done when stationary.

16/9 RETRACTABLE COLOUR SCREEN (WITH PEUGEOT CONNECT NAVIGATION (RNEG))

3D rendered image of a remote control device with navigation screen and control buttons (no visible text or symbols)

Displays in the screen

When the screen is unfolded, it displays the following information automatically and directly:

• time,
• date,
• altitude,
  ambient temperature (the value displayed fl ashes if there is a risk of ice),
• doors check,
  warning and vehicle function status messages, displayed temporarily,
• audio functions,
• trip computer information,
• satellite navigation system information. Depending on the equipment fitted to your vehicle, the trip computer information appears in either the multifunction screen or the instrument panel screen.

Controls

Diagram of a car dashboard with labeled control panels and buttons, showing status indicators and function buttons.

From the Peugeot Connect Navigation (RNEG) control panel, to select one of the applications:

press the dedicated "RADIO", "MUSIC", "NAV", "TRAFFIC", "SETUP" or "PHONE" button for access to the corresponding menu,
turn the navigator to move the selection,
press the navigator to confirm the selection,

or

press the "ESC" button to abandon the current operation and return to the previous display.

For more information on these applications, refer to the "Audio and Telematics" section.

For operation of the retractable screen (opening, closing, adjustment of the position, refer to the paragraph "Access retractable screen".

"SETUP" menu

Press the "SETUP" button for access to the "SETUP" menu. This allows you to select from the following functions:

• "Languages",
• "Date and time",
• "Display",
• "Vehicle parameters",
• "Units",
• "System".

Languages

This menu allows you to select the language used by the display: Deutsch, English, Espanol, Français, Italiano, Nederlands, Polski, Portugues, Türkçe *.

Date and time

This menu allows you to set the date and time, the format of the date and the format of the time (refer to the "Audio and Telematics" section or to the specific user guide given to you with the other owner's documents).

Display

This menu allows you to set the brightness of the screen, the screen colour scheme and the colour of the map (day/night or auto mode).

Vehicle parameters

This menu allows you to activate or deactivate certain driving and comfort equipment (according to country):

wiper linked with reverse gear (refer to the "Visibility" section),

• selective unlocking (refer to the "Access" section),
• guide-me-home and welcome lighting (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• interior mood lighting (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• daytime running lamps (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• directional headlamps (refer to the "Visibility" section),
• automatic or manual parking brake (refer to the "Driving" section),

- ...

Units

This menu allows you to select the units: temperature (°C or °F) and fuel consumption (km/l, l/100 or mpg).

System

This menu allows you to restore the factory configuration, display the software version and activate scrolling text.

For safety reasons, configuration of the multifunction screen by the driver must only be done when stationary.

16/9 HIGH DEFINITION RETRACTABLE COLOUR SCREEN (WITH PEUGEOT CONNECT MEDIA)

Illustration of a retro-style gaming device with a monitor displaying a cartoon character in the background (no text or symbols visible)

Displays on the screen

When the screen is unfolded, it displays the following information automatically and directly:

• time,
• date,
• altitude,
• ambient temperature (the value displayed fl ashes if there is a risk of ice),
• audio functions,
• telephone and address book information,
• satellite navigation system information.

Controls

LARGE | PENS NAV | BC | TURRY 000 | STOP 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

From the Peugeot Connect Media control panel, to select one of the applications:

press the dedicated "RADIO", "MEDIA", "NAV", "TRAFFIC", "ADDR BOOK" or "SETUP" button for access to the corresponding menu,
turn the navigator to move the selection,
press the navigator to confirm the selection,
or
press the "ESC" button to abandon the current operation and return to the previous display.

For more information on these applications, refer to the "Audio and Telematics" section or to the specific user guide given to you with the other owner's documents.

For operation of the retractable screen (opening, closing, adjustment of the position, etc.), refer to the paragraph "Access to the retractable screen".

"SETUP" menu

Language & Speech Date & Time Display Units System ATMC 19.02.2010 190m 20°

Press the "SETUP" button for access to the "SETUP" menu. This allows you to select from the following functions:

• "Languages and voice functions",
• "Date and time",
• "Display",
• "Units",
• "System".

Language and voice functions

This menu allows you to:

• select the language used by screen (Deutsch, English, Espanol, Français, Italiano, Nederlands, Polski, Portugues, Türkçe *),
• select the voice recognition parameters (activation/deactivation, advice on use, personal voice programming, etc.),
• set the volume of the voice synthesiser.

Date and time

This menu allows you to set the date and time, the format of the date and the format of the time (refer to the "Audio and Telematics" section or to the specific user guide given to you with the other owner's documents).

Display

This menu allows you to set the brightness of the screen, the screen colour scheme and the colour of the map (day/night or auto mode).

Units

This menu allows you to select the units: temperature (°C or °F) and distance (miles or km).

System parameters

This menu allows you to restore the factory configuration, display the software version and activate scrolling text.

For safety reasons, configuration of the multifunction screen by the driver must only be done when stationary.

Diagram of a device with labeled points A and B, showing an orange arrow pointing upward on the screen (no text or symbols beyond labels)

Access to the retractable screen

This screen is opened and stored automatically.

However, you can also open it, store it and adjust it using the various manual controls:

- opening or storing by means of control A, - angle adjustments by means of control B. It is also fitted with safety auto-reverse protection.

Opening the screen

With the screen stored, press control A to open it.

The screen opens automatically when the ignition is switched on, when the audio and telematics system is switched on, when an outgoing telephone call is made, when a voice command is given and when a warning message linked with the STOP warning lamp is received.

If you close the screen during operation of the audio and telematics system, it will re-open automatically when an outgoing telephone call is made, when a voice command is given or when a warning message linked with the STOP warning lamp is received.

Closing the screen

With the screen open, press control A to store it.

The screen is stored automatically when the ignition is switched off, after approximately three seconds, if the audio and telematics system is off.

Safety auto-reverse

If the screen meets an obstacle as it opens or closes, the movement stops immediately and is reversed by a few millimetres.

After clearing the obstacle, issue the command required again.

If you wish the screen to open or close automatically when the audio and telematics system is switched on or off, the screen must not be closed when the audio and telematics system is operating.

Adjusting the position of the screen

Illustration of a laptop with an orange upward arrow and a circular icon labeled 'B' (no text or symbols on the device itself)

When the screen is open, you can adjust it precisely in different ways:

press the corresponding part of control B to move the screen towards you or towards the windscreen,
or
push or pull the screen gently by hand.

Storing the position of the screen

The system has four pre-set positions in its memory.

Each time the screen is closed, the system stores the last position of the screen.

Each time the screen is re-opened, the system returns the screen to the pre-set position closest to that stored.

TRIP COMPUTER

System which provides current information concerning the trip travelled (range, fuel consumption...).

Monochrome screen A

1:17 CHERIEFM 20°C 360 MILES LD ROS TA FM_INT

Information displays

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

) Press the button, located at the end of the wiper stalk, to display the various items of trip computer data in succession.

The trip computer provides the following information:

- range,

- current fuel consumption,

- distance travelled,

- average fuel consumption,

- average speed.

) The next press then returns you to the normal display.

Zero reset

2 1 0 R/15 s + 2s

) Press the control for more than two seconds to reset to zero the distance travelled, the average fuel consumption and the average speed.

TRIP COMPUTER

System which provides current information concerning the trip (range, consumption...).

Monochrome screen C

11:32 Tue 23/03/20 10 23° 1 2 360 miles 34.0 MPG 320 miles

16/9 colour screen - Peugeot Connect Navigation

3D rendered image of a remote control device with navigation screen and buttons (no visible text or symbols)

Instrument panel screen - Peugeot Connect Media

55 Pause mph 500 mph 10,2 mpg

Information displays

With the screen C or the colour screen (Peugeot Connect Navigation)

AUTO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

Press the button, located at the end of the wiper stalk, to display the various trip computer tabs in succession.

With the instrument panel screen (Peugeot Connect Media)

Close-up of a car dashboard control panel with orange arrows indicating left and right motion, alongside a technical line drawing of the dashboard (no text or symbols)

Press the up and down arrows on the navigator, associated with the Peugeot Connect Media, to display the various trip computer tabs in succession.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the trip computer information appears on the multifunction screen or on the instrument panel screen.

- The current information tab with:

• the range,
  • the current fuel consumption,
  • the distance remaining to be travelled.

- The trip "1" tab with:

• the distance travelled,
• the average fuel consumption,
- the average speed, for the first trip.

- The trip "2" tab with:

• the distance travelled,
• the average fuel consumption,
• the average speed, for the second trip.

Trip zero reset

With the screen C or the colour screen (Peugeot Connect Navigation)

AUTO + 2s

When the trip required is displayed, press the control for more than two seconds.

With the instrument panel screen (Peugeot Connect Media)

Close-up of a car control knob with an orange arrow pointing to it, alongside a technical line drawing of the dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

When the required trip is displayed, press the "OK" button on the navigator, associated with the Peugeot Connect Media, for more than two seconds.

Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use is identical.

For example, trip "1" can be used for daily figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.

√ Pressing the button again takes you to a black screen.

A further press returns you to the normal display.

A few definitions...

Range

(miles or km)

This indicates the distance which can still be travelled

with the fuel remaining in the tank in relation to the average fuel consumption over the last few miles (kilometres) travelled.

This value may vary following a change in the style of driving or the relief, resulting in a cant change in the current fuel mption.

When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km), dashes are displayed. After fi ll-ing with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is displayed when it exceeds 60 miles (100 km).

If dashes are displayed continuously while driving in place of the digits, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Current fuel consumption

(mpg or l/100 km or km/l) This is the average fuel consumption during the last few seconds.

This function is only displayed from 20 mph (30 km/h).

Average fuel consumption

(mpg or l/100 km or km/l) This is the average fuel consumption since the last trip computer zero reset.

Average speed

(mph or km/h)

This is the average speed calculated since the last trip computer zero reset (ignition on).

Distance travelled

(miles or km)

This indicates the distance travelled since the last trip computer zero reset.

Distance remaining to destination

(miles or km)

This is the distance remaining to be travelled to the fi nal destination. It is either calculated instantly by the navigation system, if guidance is activated, or entered by the user.

If the distance is not entered, dashes are displayed in place of the digits.

Stop & Start time counter

(minutes/seconds or hours/minutes)

If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, a time counter calculates the time spent in STOP mode during a journey.

It resets to zero every time the ignition is switched on with the key.

Diagram of a car interior with numbered directional arrows indicating traffic flow or movement, labeled 1 through 7.

HEATING AND VENTILATION

System which creates and maintains good conditions of comfort and visibility in the vehicle's passenger compartment.

Air intake

The air circulating in the passenger compartment is fi Itered and originates either from the outside via the grille located at the base of the windscreen or from the inside in air recirculation mode.

Controls

The incoming air follows various routes depending on the controls selected by the driver, the front passenger and rear passengers, according to the level of equipment.

The temperature control enables you to obtain the level of comfort required by mixing the air of the various circuits.

The air distribution control enables you to select the air vents used in the passenger compartment by the combined use of the associated buttons.

The air flow control enables you to increase or reduce the speed of the ventilation fan.

These controls are grouped together on control panel A on the centre console.

Air distribution

1. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents.
2. Front side window demisting/defrosting vents.
3. Side adjustable air vents.
4. Central adjustable air vents.
5. Air outlets to the front footwells.
6. Adjustable air vents for the rear passengers.
7. Air outlets to the rear footwells.

Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning

In order for these systems to be fully effective, follow the operation and maintenance guidelines below:

If the interior temperature remains very high after the vehicle has been parked in the sun for a considerable time, first ventilate the passenger compartment for a few minutes.
Place the air flow control at a sufficient level to provide an adequate renewal of air in the passenger compartment.
To obtain an even air distribution, take care not to obstruct the exterior air intake grilles located at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents and the air outlets, as well as the air extractor located in the boot.
Use in preference the intake of exterior air as prolonged use of the air recirculation may cause misting of the windows and side windows.
Do not cover the sunshine sensor, located on the dashboard; this is used for regulation of the automatic air conditioning system.
Operate the air conditioning system for 5 to 10 minutes, once or twice a month to keep it in good working order.
- Ensure that the passenger compartment filter is in good condition and have the filter elements replaced regularly (refer to the "Checks" section).
We recommend the use of a combined passenger compartment filter. Thanks to its second special active filter, it contributes to the purification of the air breathed by the occupants and the cleanliness of the passenger compartment (reduction of allergic symptoms, bad odours and greasy deposits).
The air conditioning uses power from the engine while operating. This results in an increase in the vehicle's fuel consumption.
When towing at or near maximum capacity or on steep slopes in high ambient temperatures, switching off the air conditioning saves engine power and so improves towing capacity.
Condensation created by the air conditioning results in a discharge of water under the vehicle when stationary, which is perfectly normal.
To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, you are also advised to have it checked regularly.
If the system does not produce cold air, do not use it and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

The air conditioning system does not contain chlorine and does not present any danger to the ozone layer.

REAR VENTILATION ADJUSTMENT

Close-up of a car air vent with control buttons and airflow arrows (no text or symbols)

Close-up of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating control buttons (no text or symbols)

After pressing the "REAR" button, turn the adjustment dial of the rear side vents to decrease or increase the flow of air.

Take care not to obstruct the side vents and the air outlets on the floor.

To shut off the flow of air, close the vents and set the dial to 0.

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING

① ② ③ ④ A/C ⑤

The air conditioning can only operate with the engine running.

1. Temperature adjustment

Turn the dial from blue (cold) to red (hot) to adjust the temperature to your requirements.

2. Air flow adjustment

Turn the dial from position 1 to position 5 to obtain a comfortable air flow.

If you place the air flow control in position 0 (deactivation of the system), the temperature is no longer

maintained at a comfortable level. However, a slight flow of air, due to the movement of the vehicle, can still be felt.

Footwells, front-rear (closing the vents increases the flow to the footwells).

Central, side and rear vents.

The air distribution can be adapted by placing the dial in an intermediate position.

3. Air distribution adjustment

Windscreen and side windows.

Windscreen, side windows and front-rear footwells.

Press the button to recirculate the interior air. The indicator lamp comes on to confirm this.

Press the button again to permit the intake of exterior air. The indicator lamp goes off to confirm this.

Three circular industrial control buttons with no visible text or symbols on the surfaces

Demisting/defrosting

The marking on the control panel indicates the position of the controls to quickly demist or defrost the windscreen and side windows:

place the air intake control 4 in the "Exterior air intake" position (indicator lamp off),
place the air distribution dial 3 in the "Windscreen position",
place the air flow dial 2 in position 5 (maximum),
place the temperature dial 1 in the red position (hot).

5. Air conditioning On/Off

The air conditioning is designed to operate effectively in all seasons, with the windows closed.

It enables you to:

• lower the temperature, in summer,
• increase the effectiveness of the demisting in winter, above 3 °C.

Switching on

Press the "A/C" button, the button's indicator lamp comes on.

The air conditioning does not operate when the air flow adjustment control 2 is in position "0".

To obtain cooled air more quickly, you can use recycling of the interior air for a few moments. Then return to fresh air intake.

Switching off

Press the "A/C" button again, the button's indicator lamp goes off.

Switching off may affect comfort levels (humidity, condensation).

REAR SCREEN DEMIST/DEFROST

The control button is located on the air conditioning system control panel.

Switching on

The rear screen demist/defrost can only operate when the engine is running.

Press this button to demist/defrost the rear screen and the door mirrors. The indicator lamp associated with the button comes on.

Switching off

The demist/defrost switches off automatically to prevent an excessive consumption of current.

It is possible to stop the demist/defrost operation before it is switched off automatically by pressing the button again. The indicator lamp associated with the button switches off.

With Stop & Start, when dem- isting has been activated, the STOP mode is not available. Switching off may affect comfort levels (humidity, condensation).

Switch off the demist/defrost of the rear screen and door mirrors as soon as it is no longer necessary as lower current consumption results in reduced fuel consumption.

DUAL-ZONE DIGITAL AIR CONDITIONING

20.5 3 1 4 AUTO 6 7 9 21 2 A/C 5

The air conditioning only operates when the engine is running.

Automatic operation

1. Automatic comfort programme

Press the "AUTO" button. The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

We recommend the use of this mode: it permits automatic and optimised adjustment of all of the functions, passenger compartment temperature, air flow, air distribution and air recirculation, in accordance with the comfort value that you have chosen.

This system is designed to operate effectively in all seasons, with the windows closed.

When the engine is cold, to prevent too great a distribution of cold air, the air flow will its optimum level gradually.

In cold weather, it favours the distribution of warm air to the windscreen, side windows and footwells only.

2-3. Driver-passenger side adjustment

The driver and front passenger can each adjust the temperature to their requirements.

The value indicated on the display corresponds to a level of comfort and not to a temperature in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit.

Turn control 2 or 3 to the left or to the right respectively to decrease or increase this value.

A setting around the value 21 provides optimum comfort. However, depending on your requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is normal.

You are advised to avoid a left/right setting difference of more than 3.

On entering the vehicle, if the interior temperature is much colder or warmer than the

comfort value, there is no need to change the value displayed in order to obtain the comfort required more quickly. The system corrects the difference in temperature automatically and as quickly as possible.

4. Automatic visibility programme

The automatic comfort programme may not be sufficient to quickly demist or defrost the windscreen and side windows (humidity, several passengers, ice, etc.).

In this case, select the automatic visibility programme.

The system automatically controls the air conditioning, the air flow and the air intake and provides optimum distribution of the ventilation to the windscreen and side windows.

To switch it off, press the "visibility" button again or press the "AUTO" button, the indicator lamp in the button goes off or the indicator lamp on the "AUTO" button comes on.

Manual operation

If you wish, you can make a different choice from that offered by the system by changing a setting. The other functions will still be controlled automatically.

Pressing the "AUTO" button returns the system to completely automatic operation.

5. Air conditioning On/Off

Press this button to switch off the air conditioning.

Switching the system off could result in discomfort (humidity, condensation).

Press this button again to return automatic operation of the air conditioning. The indicator lamp in the "A/C" button comes on.

7. Air flow adjustment

Turn this control to the left to decrease the air flow or to the right to increase the air flow.

The air flow indicator lamps, between the two fans, come on progressively according to the value requested.

For maximum cooling or heating of the passenger compartment, it is possible to exceed the mini-alue 14 or the maximum value 28.

Turn control 2 or 3 to the left until "LO" (low) is displayed or to the right until "HI" (high) is displayed.

6. Air distribution adjustment

Press one or more buttons to direct the air flow towards:

With Stop & Start, when demisting has been activated, the STOP mode is not available.

• the windscreen and side windows (demisting or defrosting),
• the windscreen, the side windows and the vents,
• the windscreen, the side windows, the vents and the footwells,
• the vents and the footwells,
• the vents,
• the footwells,
• the windscreen, the side windows and the footwells.

8. Air recirculation

Press this button to recirculate the interior air. The indicator lamp comes on.

9. Rear ventilation (Rear)

• Air closed/intake (automatic mode). Press this button, the warning lamp comes on.
• Forced closing of the air intake (manual mode). Press this button to recirculate the interior air, the warning lamp come on.

Air recirculation enables the passenger compartment to be isolated from exterior odours and smoke.

As soon as possible, press t "auto" button to allow the intake of exterior air and avoid the misting of windows.

Press this button to allow the air to circulate towards the rear. The temperature will be equal to the left-hand comfort value for the rear left passengers and equal to the right-hand comfort value for the rear right passengers. The indicator lamp in the button comes on.

Switching the system off

Tum the air flow control to the left until all of the indicator lamps go off.

the This action switches off all of the functions of the system.

Temperature related comfort is no longer guaranteed but a slight flow of air, due to the movement of the vehicle, can still be felt.

Turn the air flow dial to the right or press the "AUTO" button to reactivate the system with the values set before it was switched off.

Avoid driving for prolonged periods with the system off.

FRONT SEATS

Seat consisting of a seat cushion, a seat back and a head restraint which can all be adjusted to adapt your position for ease of driving and comfort.

Manual adjustments

Forwards-backwards adjustment

Raise the control and slide the seat forwards or backwards.

Driver's or passenger's seat height adjustment

Pull the control upwards to raise or push it downwards to lower, as many times as necessary, to obtain the position required.

Seat back angle adjustment

→ Push the control rearwards.

Interior view of a car showing a person seated in a car seat, with dashboard and steering wheel visible (no text or symbols)

Abstract line drawing with a purple arrow pointing to a curved black line (no text or symbols)

Interior view of a car cockpit with a person seated in the seat, showing dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Diagram of a car handle with bidirectional arrow indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Interior view of a car showing a person seated in the seat of a vehicle, with dashboard and steering wheel visible (no text or symbols)

Diagram of a car interior showing a hand cursor and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

DRIVER'S ELECTRIC SEAT

Seat consisting of a seat cushion, a seat back and a head restraint which can all be adjusted to adapt your position for ease of driving and comfort.

Forwards-backwards adjustment

Push the control fo wards to slide the seat.

Seat cushion height and angle adjustment

Tilt the rear part of the control upwards or downwards to obtain the required height.

Tilt the front part of the control upwards or downwards to obtain the required angle.

The electrical functions of the driver's seat are active approximately one minute after opening

the front door. They are deactivated approximately one minute after the ignition is switched off and in economy mode.

To reactivate them, switch on the ignition.

Seat back angle adjustment

Tilt the control forwards or rearwards to adjust the angle of the seat back.

Interior view of a car showing a person seated in a vehicle, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

3D rendered mechanical component with blue directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

Interior view of a car cockpit with driver seated, showing dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

3D rendered object with purple directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols)

Interior view of a car cockpit with driver seated, showing dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

3D rendered mechanical component with two purple arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Additional adjustments

Head restraint height and angle adjustment

F To raise the head restraint, pull it forwards and upwards at the same time.
To remove the head restraint, press the lug A and pull the head restraint upwards.
To put the head restraint back in place, engage the head restraint stems in the openings keeping them in line with the seat back.
To lower the head restraint, press the lug A and the head restraint at the same time.
To adjust the angle of the head restraint, tilt its lower part forwards or rearwards.

Illustration of a computer monitor with arrows indicating upward and downward motion, marked with letter A (no text or symbols on the monitor itself)

The head restraint is fitted with a frame with notches which prevents it from lowering; this safety device in case of impact.

The adjustment is correct when the upper edge of the head restraint is level with the top of the head.

Never drive with the head restraints removed; they must be in place and adjusted correctly.

Manual lumbar adjustment

Turn the knob to obtain the desired level of lumbar support.

Line drawing of a car interior with an inset showing a blue sphere and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Heated seats control

With the engine running, the front seats can be heated separately.

Use the adjustment dial, placed on the side of each front seat, to switch on and select the level of heating required:

0: Off.

1 : Low.
2 : Medium.
3 : High.

Interior view of a car showing a person seated in a vehicle, with a close-up inset of the dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Table position, front passenger seat

Interior view of a car seat with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

3D rendered illustration of a hand with a purple arrow pointing to the palm area (no text or symbols)

3D rendered image of a hand gripping a car seat, with a purple arrow indicating the direction (no text or symbols present)

Folding the seat backrest

Raise the armrest and fold up the This position, associated with that of the "aircraft" style table, fixed on the rear seats, allows you to transport long back of the seat. objects inside the vehicle.
Check that no object, either on or The maximum weight on the seat is underneath the seat, could hinder 30 kg. its movement.
To make the operation easier, place the head restraint in the low position (if the seat is in the fully forward position).
If your vehicle is fitted with the video pack, place the protective cover on the head restraint.
Lift the control, located behind the seat, then guide the seat back forwards.

Returning the seat to the normal position

Guide the seat backrest rearwards until it locks in place.

Diagram of a car interior showing two vehicle compartments with one highlighted (no text or symbols)

When the seat backrest is in this position, only the 2 ndrow passenger seat located behind the driver can be used.

REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS

Diagram showing two car interior compartments with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols present)

The rear head restraints can be removed and have two positions:

- high, position for use,

- low, storage position.

To raise a head restraint, pull it upwards.

To lower it, press the lug then the head restraint.

To remove it, place it in the high position, push the lug and pull it upwards.

To refit it, engage the head restraint rods in the holes taking care to remain in line with the seat back.

Never drive with the head restraints removed, they must be in place and correctly adjusted.

2ND ROW SEATS

Forwards-backwards adjustment

A

Lift the control A, located at the front of the seat, then adjust the seat to the position desired.

"Comfort" position

Interior view of a car showing three seats with two downward-pointing arrows indicating directions (no text or symbols present)

The three 2nd row seats are independent of each other and all the same width. They all have a "comfort" position.

Placing a seat in the "comfort" position

Diagram showing airplane seat belt and seat with directional arrows indicating movement or force

√ Pull on the control B and guide the seat rearwards.

The backrest reclines and the seat base moves forward slightly.

Returning the seat to the initial position

√ Pull on the control B and allow the seat to come forwards.

Always supervise any movements of seats by children.

Flat floor

Each seat can be folded onto the floor to enable you to modify your vehicle's interior space.

Folding the seat from the 2 nd row

Diagram of a car seatbelt seat with directional arrows indicating movement, no text or symbols present

Folding the seat from the boot

Interior view of a car showing three vehicle-mounted sensors labeled D, with no visible text or symbols beyond labels

Repositioning seat

3D mechanical component diagrams showing internal components and a highlighted section (no text or symbols)

Place the seats as far towards the When loading, for example, you can rear as possible. fold the seat or seats directly from the
Pull firmly upwards on strap C, to unlock the seat; keep pulling until the seat is fully folded.
Push the backrest slightly forwards so that the backrest pivots, folding onto the seat base. The assembly then lowers onto the floor.
When loading, for example, you can fold the seat or seats directly from the boot, once you have folded the 3 rd row seats (7 seat version).
Place the seats as far towards the rear as possible.
Pull on the strap D to release the chosen seat and push the backrest gently forwards.

If necessary, return the 2nd row seat rigid panels to their initial position and lock them.
Raise the backrest and push it rearwards until it locks.

Before moving the 3 rd row seats (7 seat version), return the 2nd row seat rigid panels

to their initial position and lock them.

Emergency exit: if the first system (strap C) fails, strap D enables the 3 rd row passengers to exit quickly.

Supervise any movement of seats by children.

To avoid damaging the mechanism, the strap D unclips under excessive force. Simply reclip it are the system to working order.

Rigid panel

3D mechanical component diagram showing internal parts with directional arrows, no readable text or symbols

Each 2 nd row seat backrest has a rigid panel attached.

This panel enables you:

• to have a continuous load surface in the boot, whatever the positions of the seats,
• to avoid having objects sliding under the 2 nd row seats. 30 kg maximum on each panel.

Releasing/Locking the rigid panel

Before deploying the rigid panels, check that the 2 nd row seats are positioned as far towards the rear as possible.
Slide the latch E on the panel upwards, to release it.
Return the panel to its initial position, then slide the latch E downwards, to lock it in place.

Enterig/Exiting the 3rd row (7 seat version)

Diagram showing car seatbelt mechanism with purple arrows indicating clockwise rotation and a label 'F' pointing to the seat.

Raise the aircraft style table on the 2 nd row seat if it is down.
Hold the control F in the raised position, the seat unlocks and the seat base comes up against the backrest.
Push the seat backrest forwards, holding the control F forwards.

Repositioning the seat, from the outside, with the door open

If there are passengers seated in the 3 rd row (7 seat version):

Manually return the assembly as far as possible rearwards; the seat does not return as far as the maximum rearwards position so as to retain leg space for the 3 rd row passengers.
Fold the seat base.

3RD ROW SEATS (7 SEAT VERSION)

Concertina boards

Diagram of a car backrest with two directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols present)

Two rigid concertina boards, which cannot be separated from the vehicle, cover the two 3 rd row seats, when these are in the folded position.

Folding the concertina boards

Pull on the control, the 3 sections of the board will fold like a concertina. When the 3rd row seats are upright, these concertina boards can be left either:

- fl at behind the seats,

in the vertical position,

thereby leaving a storage area available. The two rigid boards can each support a maximum of 100 kg.

Installing a seat

Interior view of a vehicle showing a car seatbelt with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Remove the load space screen.

If necessary, return the 2nd row rigid panels to their initial position and lock them.
Correctly position the concertina board vertically behind the seat.
Pull on the control G, located behind the seat backrest. The backrest tilts rearwards pulling the seat base with it. The seat locks in the open position.

Storig a seat

Interior view of a car seat with hand placement and speed limit indicator (no text or symbols)

Lower the head restraints.
Correctly position the concertina board vertically behind the seat.
Pull on the control H, located at the bottom of the seat backrest. The seat is released.
Next push the backrest gently forwards. The backrest pivots folding onto the seat base. The seat base then folds into the stowage area provided for that purpose.
Reposition the concertina boards over the folded seats.

Before moving the 3 rd row seats, return the rigid panels of the 2 nd row seats to the up-position and lock them in place.

Do not try to fold a 3 rdow seat that has not first had the backrest fully locked in place.

Do not leave objects either on or underneath the seat bases of the 3 rd row seats when you are folding them.

Do not leave your hand on the control H as you fold the seats, as you risk trapping your fingers.

SEAT MODULARITY AND THE VARIOUS SEAT CONFIGURATIONS

Designed to be modular, your vehicle offers numerous seat installation and loading confi gurations.

Operations to change the existing confi guration must only be carried out when stationary (see paragraphs "Rear seats".

Examples of configurations

7 seats

Diagram of a car interior showing three seats and a blue accent, no text or symbols present

Transport (4 seats)

Diagram of a car interior showing two seats and rear seats, with no text or symbols present.

Transporting long objects
5 seats

Diagram of a car showing front and rear views of two passenger cars with seat covers (no text or symbols)

Diagram of a car showing three vehicle compartments with no text or symbols

Loading a large volume

Side view illustration of a car with a cargo pallet and a person lifting it (no text or symbols)

MIRRORS

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Door mirrors

Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glass permitting the lateral rearward vision necessary for overtaking or parking. They can also be folded for parking in confined spaces.

Adjustment

A B

Move control A to the right or to the left to select the corresponding mirror.
Move control B in all four directions to adjust.
^F Return control A to the central position.

Folding

• Automatic: lock the vehicle using the remote control or the key.
• Manual: with the ignition on, pull control A rearwards.

If the mirrors are folded using control A, they will not unfold when the vehicle is unlocked. Pull again on control A.

Unfolding

• Automatic: unlock the vehicle using the remote control or the key.
• Manual: with the ignition on, pull control A rearwards.

Demisting - Defrosting

If your vehicle is fitted with heated mirrors, the demisting-defrosting operates with the engine running, by switching on the heated rear screen (refer to the "Rear screen demist-defrost" page).

The objects observed are, in reality, closer than they appear.

Take this into account in order to correctly judge the distance of vehicles approaching from behind.

The folding and unfolding of the door mirrors using the remote control can be deac-

tivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Fold the mirrors when putting your vehicle through an automatic car wash.

Rear view mirror

Adjustable mirror providing a central rearward view.

Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which darkens the mirror glass: this reduces the nuisance to the driver caused by the headlamps from following vehicles, low sun...

Manual day/night model

Diagram of a car rearview mirror with a directional arrow indicating left side (no text or symbols present)

Adjustment

Adjust the mirror so that the glass is directed correctly in the "day" position.

Day/night position

Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti-dazzle position.
Push the lever to change to the normal "day" position.

As a safety measure, the mirrors should be adjusted to reduce the "blind spot".

Automatic day/night model

Illustration of a car front-mounted steering wheel (no text or symbols)

By means of a sensor, which measures the light from the rear of the vehicle, this system automatically and progressively changes between the day and night uses.

In order to ensure optimum visibility during your manoeuvres, the mirror lightens automatically when reverse gear is engaged.

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT

Illustration of a steering wheel with directional arrows indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols)

When stationary, pull the control lever to release the adjustment mechanism.

Adjust the height and reach to suit your driving position.
Push the control lever to lock the adjustment mechanism.

As a safety precaution, these operations should only be carried out while the vehicle is stationary.

REMOTE CONTROL KEY

System which permits central unlocking or locking of the vehicle using the lock or from a distance. It is also used to locate and start the vehicle, as well as providing protection against theft.

Complete unlocking using the key

Turn the key to the left in the driver's door lock to unlock the vehicle.

Unlocking is confirmed by rapid flashing of the direction indicators for approximately two seconds.

According to version, the door mirrors unfold at the same time.

Each unlocking is confirmed by rapid fl ashing of the direction indicators for approximately two seconds.

According to version, the door mirrors unfold at the same time as the first unlocking action.

The selective unlocking is only available on versions fitted with deadlocking.

Close-up of a black car key with four slots and a blue upward arrow, no text or symbols visible.

Selective unlocking using the remote control

Press the open padlock once to unlock the driver's door only.

Press the open padlock again to unlock the other doors and the boot.

The complete or selective unlocking parameter is set via the multifunction screen configuration menu.

Complete unlocking is activated by default.

Unlockig the vehicle

Unfolding the key

First press this button to unfold the key.

Complete unlocking using the remote control

Press the open padlock to unlock the vehicle.

Selective unlocking using the key

Turn the key to the left in the driver's door lock once to unlock the driver's door only.
Turn the key to the left in the driver's door lock again to unlock the other doors and the boot.

Locking the vehicle

Normal locking using the remote control

Press the closed padlock to lock the vehicle completely.

Press the closed padlock for more than two seconds to close the windows automatically in addition to locking (according to version).

Normal locking using the key

Turn the key to the right in the driver's door lock to lock the vehicle completely. Locking is confirmed by fixed lighting of the direction indicators for approximately two seconds.

According to version, the door mirrors fold at the same time.

If one of the doors or the boot is still open, the central locking does not take place.

When the vehicle is locked, if it is unlocked inadvertently, it will relock automatically after thirty seconds unless a door is opened.

The folding and unfolding of the door mirrors using the remote control can be deac- d by a PEUGEOT dealer or a ed workshop.

Deadlocking using the remote control

Press the closed padlock to lock the vehicle completely or press the closed padlock for more than two seconds to close the windows automatically in addition to locking (according to version).

Press the closed padlock again within five seconds to deadlock the vehicle.

Deadlocking using the key

Turn the key to the right in the driver's door lock to lock the vehicle completely and hold it in this position for more than two seconds to close the windows automatically in addition to locking (according to version).
Turn the key to the right again within five seconds to deadlock the vehicle. Deadlocking is confirmed by fixed lighting of the direction indicators for approximately two seconds.

According to version, the door mirrors fold at the same time.

Deadlocking renders the exterior and interior door controls inoperative.

It also deactivates the manual central control button.

Therefore, never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked.

Folding the key

Close-up of a black key with four car icons and a blue arrow indicating left-hand rule (no text or symbols on the key itself)

First press this button to fold the key.

If you do not press the button when folding the key, there is a risk of damage to the mechanism.

Locating your vehicle

Press the closed padlock to locate your locked vehicle in a car park.

This is indicated by lighting of the direction indicators for a few seconds.

Anti-theft protection

Electronic engine immobiliser

The key contains an electronic chip which has a special code. When the ignition is switched on, this code must be recognised in order for starting to be possible.

This electronic engine immobiliser locks the engine management system a few minutes after the ignition is switched off and prevents starting of the engine by anyone who does not have the key.

In the event of a fault, you are informed by illumination of this warning lamp, an audible signal and a message in the screen.

In this case, your vehicle will not start; contact a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible.

Keep safely the label attached to the keys given to you on acquisition of the vehicle.

Starting the vehicle

Insert the key in the ignition switch. The system recognises the starting code.
Turn the key fully towards the dashboard to position 3 (Starting).
When the engine starts, release the key.

Diagram showing car door lock mechanism with numbered instructions and a device panel

Switching the vehicle off

Immobilise the vehicle.
Turn the key fully towards you to position 1 (Stop).
Remove the key from the ignition switch.

Energy economy mode

After switching off the engine (position 1-Stop), you can still use functions such as the audio and telematics system, the wipers, the dipped headlamps, the courtesy lamps, etc. for a maximum combined period of thirty minutes.

For more information, refer to the "Practical information - Energy economy mode" section.

A heavy object (key fob...), attached to the key and weighing down on its shaft in the ignition switch, could cause a malfunction.

Remote control problem

Following disconnection of the vehicle battery, replacement of the remote control battery or in the event of a remote control malfunction, you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your vehicle.

First of all, use the key in the lock to unlock or lock your vehicle.
Then, reinitialise the remote control. If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible.

Switch off the ignition.

Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition on).
Press the closed padlock immediately for a few seconds.
Switch off the ignition and remove the key from the ignition switch.

The remote control is fully operational again.

Changing the battery

Illustration of a smart lock mechanism with a magnified view showing internal components (no text or symbols)

Battery ref.: CR1620/3 volts. Reinitialisation

If the battery is fl at, you are informed by illumination of this warning lamp, an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen.

Unclip the casing using a coin at the notch.
Slide the flat battery out of its location.
Slide the new battery into its location observing the original direction.
Clip the casing.
Reinitialise the remote control.

Lost keys

Visit a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's registration document, your personal identification documents and if possible the key code label.

The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to find the key code and the transponder code required to order a new key.

Remote control

The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system; do not operate it while it is in your pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle, without you being aware of it.

Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and out of sight of your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from working and the remote control would have to be reinitialised.

The remote control does not operate when the key is in the ignition switch, even when the ignition is switched off, except for reinitialisation.

Lockig the vehicle

Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the emergency services more difficult in an emergency.

As a safety precaution (with children on board), remove the key from the ignition switch when you leave the vehicle, even for a short time.

Anti-theft protection

Do not make any modifications to the electronic engine immobiliser system; this could cause malfunctions.

When purchasig a second-hand vehicle

Have the pairing of all of the keys in your possession checked by a PEUGEOT dealer, to ensure that only your keys can be used to open and start the vehicle.

Do not throw the remote control batteries away, they contain metals which are harmful to the environment.

Take them to an approved collection point.

ALARM

System which protects and provides a deterrent against the theft of your vehicle. It provides two types of protection, exterior and interior, as well as an anti-tamper function.

Exterior perimiter protection

The system detects opening of the vehicle.

The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to enter the vehicle by forcing a door, the boot or the bonnet.

Interior volumetric protection

The system detects any variation in the volume in the passenger compartment.

The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a window or moves inside the vehicle.

If you wish to leave a pet in the vehicle or a window partially open, deactivate the interior volumetric protection.

Anti-tamper function

The system detects the putting out of service of its components.

The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to put the wires of the siren, the central control or the battery out of service.

Do not make any modifications to the alarm system, this could cause malfunctions.

Lockig the vehicle with full alarm

A OFF

Activation

Switch off the ignition and get out of the vehicle.

Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the locking button on the remote control.

The alarm is activated; the indicator lamp in button A flashes once per second.

Deactivation

Unlock the vehicle using the unlocking button on the remote control.

The alarm is deactivated; the indicator lamp in button A switches off.

Locking the vehicle with exterior protection alarm only

Deactivation of the interior volumetric protection

Switch off the ignition.

Within ten seconds, press button A until the indicator lamp is on continuously.

Get out of the vehicle.

Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the locking button on the remote control.

The exterior protection alarm alone remains activated; the indicator lamp in button A flashes once per second.

To be effective, this deactivation must be carried out each time the ignition is switched off.

Reactivation of the interior volumetric protection

Unlock the vehicle using the unlocking button on the remote control.

Relock the vehicle using the remote control.

The alarm is activated again with both types of protection; the indicator lamp in button A switches off.

Triggering

This is indicated by sounding of the siren and fl ashing of the direction indicators for approximately thirty seconds.

After it has been triggered, the alarm is again operational.

If the alarm is triggered ten times in succession, the eleventh time will result in it becoming inactive.

If the indicator lamp in button A fl ashes rapidly, this indicates that the alarm was triggered during your absence. When the ignition is switched on, this flashing stops immediately.

To avoid triggering the alarm when washing your vehicle, lock it using the key in the driver's door lock.

Do not activate the alarm before disconnecting the battery, otherwise the siren will sound.

Failure of the remote control

Unlock the vehicle using the key in the driver's door lock.
Open the door; the alarm is triggered.
Switch on the ignition; the alarm stops.

Locking the vehicle without activating the alarm

Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key in the driver's door lock.

Automatic operation \*

Depending on the legislation in force in our country, one of these cases may occur:

• 45 seconds after the vehicle is locked using the remote control, the alarm is activated, regardless of the status of the doors and boot.
• 2 minutes after the last door or the boot is closed, the alarm is activated.
  To avoid triggering the alarm on entering the vehicle, first press the unlocking button on the remote control.

Malfunction

When the ignition is switched on, illumination the indicator lamp in button A for ten seconds indicates a siren fault.

Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

ELECTRIC WINDOWS

System intended to open or close a window manually or automatically. Fitted with a safety anti-pinch system and a system for deactivation in the event of misuse of the rear controls.

Diagram showing a car dashboard with numbered UI elements and a control panel interface

1. Driver's electric window control.
2. Passenger's electric window control.
3. Rear right electric window control.
4. Rear left electric window control.
5. Deactivation of the rear electric window and door controls.

One-touch electric windows

There are two options:

manual mode

Press or pull the control gently. The window stops when the control is released.

- automatic mode

Press or pull the control firmly. The window opens or closes fully when the control is released.
Pressing the control again stops the movement of the window.

The electric window controls remain operational for approximately 45 seconds after the ignition is switched off or until the vehicle is locked after a front door is opened.

If one of the passenger windows cannot be operated from the driver's door control pad, carry out the operation from the control pad of the passenger door concerned, and vice versa.

After approximately ten consecutive complete opening/ closing movements of the window, a protection function is activated to prevent damage to the electric window motor.

After this, you have approximately one minute within which to close the window.

Once the window is closed, the controls will become available again after approximately 40 minutes.

Safety anti-pinch

When the window rises and meets an obstacle, it stops and partially lowers again.

If the window cannot be closed (for example, in the presence of ice), immediately after the movement is reversed:

press and hold the control until the window opens fully,
then pull the control immediately and hold it until the window closes,
continue to hold the control for approximately one second after the window has closed.

The safety anti-pinch function is not operational during these operations.

Reinitialisation

If a window does not rise automatically, its operation must be reinitialised:

pull the control until the window stops,
release the control and pull it again, repeat these operations until the window closes fully,
continue to hold the control for approximately one second after the window has closed,
press the control to lower the window automatically to the low position,
when the window has reached the low position, press the control again for approximately one second.

The safety anti-pinch function is not operational during these operations.

Deactivation of the rear electric window and door controls

Diagram showing car dashboard control panel with labeled mode number 5 and vehicle icon

For the safety of your children, with the ignition on, press control 5 to deactivate the rear electric window controls regardless of their position.

It is still possible to open the doors from the outside and operate the rear electric windows from the driver's control pad.

Indicator lamp on, the rear controls are deactivated. Indicator lamp off, the rear controls are activated.

This control also deactivates the interior controls for the rear doors (refer to the section safety - § Electric child lock").

Any other status of the indicator lamp indicates a malfunction of the electric child lock.

Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time.

If an obstacle is encountered during operation of the electric windows, you must reverse the movement of the window. To do this, press the control concerned.

When the driver operates the controls for the passengers' electric windows, they must ensure that no one is preventing correct closing of the windows.

The driver must ensure that the passengers use the electric windows correctly.

Be aware of children when operating the windows.

DOORS

Opening

From outside

3D rendered mechanical part with a green arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

After unlocking the vehicle completely using the remote control or the key, pull the door handle.

From inside

Interior view of a car showing a blue arrow pointing to a small illuminated component (no text or symbols visible)

Pull the door control (front or rear) to open the door; this unlocks this vehicle completely.

The interior door controls do not operate when the vehicle is deadlocked.

Closing

When a door is not closed correctly:

- when the engine is running, this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by a message in the multifunction screen for a few seconds,

- when the vehicle is moving (speed higher than 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen for a few seconds.

Centralised locking control

System which provides full manual locking or unlocking of the doors from the inside.

Top-down view of a vehicle parking lot with a highlighted parking area and lock button (no text or symbols)

Locking

Press this button to lock the vehicle. The red indicator lamp in the button comes on.

If one of the doors is open, the central locking from the inside does not take place.

Unlocking

Press this button again to unlock the vehicle. The red indicator lamp in the button goes off.

When locking/deadlocking from the outside

When the vehicle is locked or dead-locked from the outside, the red indicator lamp fl ashes and the button is inactive.

After normal locking, pull the interior door lever to unlock the vehicle.
After deadlocking, it is necessary to use the remote control or the key to unlock the vehicle.

Automatic central locking

System which provides full automatic locking or unlocking of the doors and boot while driving, if they are closed correctly.

You can activate or deactivate this function.

Activation

+ 2s

Press this button for more than two seconds.

A confirmation message appears in the multifunction screen, accompanied by an audible signal.

Deactivation

Press this button again for more than two seconds.

A confirmation message appears in the multifunction screen, accompanied by an audible signal.

Locking

When the speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the doors and boot lock automatically.

If one of the doors is open, the automatic central locking does not take place.

If the boot is open, the automatic central locking of the doors is active.

Unlocking

Above 6 mph (10 km/h), press this button to unlock the doors and boot temporarily.

In the event of an impact, the doors unlock automatically.

Emergency control

System which locks or unlocks the doors mechanically in the event of a malfunction of the battery or of the central locking.

In the event of a fault with the central locking, you must disconnect the battery to lock the boot and so ensure the complete locking of the vehicle.

Locking the driver's door

Insert the key in the lock, then turn it to the right.

Unlocking the driver's door

Insert the key in the lock, then turn it to the left.

Locking the front and rear passenger doors

Diagram showing a car key inserted into a vehicle's seatbelt, with numbered parts and a blue arrow indicating direction.

Insert the key in the lock, located on the edge of the door, then turn it one eighth of a turn.

Unlocking the front and rear passenger doors

Pull the interior door opening control.

BOOT

Side view of a car's front bumper with a green arrow pointing to the lid area (no text or symbols)

Openig

After unlocking the vehicle using the remote control or the key, pull the handle and raise the tailgate.

Top-down view of a car trunk with overhead airflow arrows indicating airflow direction (no text or symbols)

Closing

Lower the tailgate using the interior grab handle.

If the tailgate is not closed correctly:

when the engine is running, this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by a message in the multifunction screen for a few seconds,

- when the vehicle is moving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen for a few seconds.

When selective unlocking is activated, the boot can also be opened by a second press on the open padlock on the remote control.

Tailgate release

System allowing the mechanical unlocking of the boot in the event of a battery or central locking system malfunction.

3D illustration of a computer mouse with a screwdriver and a labeled orange handle (no text or symbols)

Unlocking

Fold back the rear seats to gain access to the lock from inside the boot.

Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the lock to unlock the tailgate.

Move the latch to the left.

Locking after closing

If the fault persists after closing again, the boot will remain locked.

FUEL TANK

Capacity of the tank: approximately 60 litres.

Low fuel level

When the low fuel level is reached, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message

in the multifunction screen. When the lamp first comes on, there is approximately 6 litres of fuel remaining.

Until sufficient fuel has been added, this warning lamp appears every time the ignition is switched on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message. When driving, this audible signal and message are repeated with increasing frequency, as the fuel level drops towards "0".

You must refuel to avoid running out of fuel.

If you run out of fuel (Diesel), refer also to the "Checks" section.

Refuelling

A label affixed to the inside of the filler flap reminds you of the type of fuel to be used according to your engine.

More than 5 litres of fuel must be added in order to be registered by the fuel gauge.

Tofi II the tank safely:

the engine must be switched off,
open the fuel filler flap,
insert the key in the cap, then turn it to the left,

remove the cap and secure it on the hook, located on the inside of the flap,
fill the tank, but do not continue after the 3rd cut-off of the nozzle; this could cause malfunctions.

When refuelling is complete:

put the cap back in place,
turn the key to the right, then remove it from the cap,
close the filler flap.

Operatig fault

A malfunction of the fuel gauge is indicated by the return to zero of the fuel gauge needle.

Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Diagram of a car door lock mechanism with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Diagram of a mechanical device with a blue arrow indicating direction, no visible text or symbols

The key cannot be removed from the lock until the cap is put back on the tank.

Opening the cap may trigger an in-rush of air. This vacuum, which is completely normal, is caused by the sealing of the fuel system.

With Stop & Start, never refuel with the system in STOP mode; you must switch off the ignition with the key.

Quality of the fuel used for petrol engines

SP95 E10

SP98

The petrol engines are perfectly compatible with E10 or E24 type petrol biofuels (containing 10 % or 24 % ethanol), conforming to European standards EN 228 and EN 15376.

E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 % ethanol) are reserved exclusively for vehicles marketed for the use of this type of fuel (BioFlex vehicles). The quality of the ethanol must comply with European standard EN 15293.

For Brazil only, special vehicles are marketed to run on fuels containing up to 100 % ethanol (E100 type).

Quality of the fuel used for Diesel engines

DIESEL

The Diesel engines are perfectly compatible with biofuels which conform to current and future European standards (Diesel fuel which complies with standard EN 590 mixed with a biofuel which complies with standard EN 14214) available at the pumps (containing up to 7% Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).

The B30 biofuel can be used in certain Diesel engines; however, this use is subject to strict application of the special servicing conditions. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

The use of any other type of (bio)fuel (vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited (risk of damage to the engine and fuel system).

Travelling abroad

As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be different in other countries, the presence of the misfuel prevention device may make refuelling impossible.

Before travelling abroad, we recommend that you check with the PEUGEOT dealer network, whether your vehicle is suitable for the fuel pumps in the country in which you want to travel.

MISFUEL PREVENTION\*

Mechanical device which prevents filling the tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It avoids the risk of engine damage that can result from fi lling with the wrong fuel.

Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention device appears when the filler cap is removed.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a gear and housing component with a tool (no text or symbols visible)

Operation

When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the fuel fi ller neck of your Diesel vehicle, it comes into contact with the fl ap. The sys- tem remains closed and prevents fi lling.

Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type fi ller nozzle.

It is still possible to use a fuel can to fill the reservoir.

In order to ensure a good flow of fuel, do not place the nozzle of the fuel can in direct contact with the flap of the misfuel prevention device.

* According to destination country.

LIGHTING CONTROLS

System for selection and control of the various front and rear lamps providing the vehicle's lighting.

Main lighting

The various front and rear lamps of the vehicle are designed to adapt the lighting progressively in relation to the climatic conditions and so improve the driver's visibility:

• sidelamps, to be seen,
• dipped beam headlamps to see without dazzling other drivers,
• main beam headlamps to see clearly when the road is clear,
• directional headlamps for improved visibility when cornering.

Additional lighting

Other lamps are installed to fulfil the requirements of particular driving conditions:

• a rear foglamp to be seen from a distance,
• front foglamps for even better visibility,
• daytime running lamps to be seen during the day.

Programming

Various automatic lighting control modes are also available according to the following options:

• guide-me-home lighting,
• automatic lighting,
• directional headlamps.

Model without AUTO lighting

A B

Model with AUTO lighting

A O AUTO ID 01 ID 02 B

Manual controls

The lighting is controlled directly by the driver by means of the ring A and the stalk B.

A. Main lighting mode selection ring: turn it to position the symbol required facing the mark.

AUTO Automatic illumination of headlamps.

Dipped headlamps or main beam headlamps.

B. Stalk for switching headlamps: pull the stalk towards you to switch the lighting between dipped and main beam headlamps.

In the lamps off and sidelamps modes, the driver can switch on the main beam headlamps temporarily ("headlamp fl ash") by maintaining a pull on the stalk.

Displays

Illumination of the corresponding indicator lamp in the instrument panel confi rms that the lighting selected is on.

Model with rear foglamp only

Diagram showing a car interior with a hand holding a key, alongside a close-up of the dashboard labeled 'C' and control buttons.

Model with front and rear foglamps

AUTO ADOI C

C. Fog lamps selection ring.

rear foglamp

This operates with the dipped beam headlamps and main beam headlamps.

To switch on the foglamp, turn the ring C forwards.

To switch off the foglamp, turn the ring C rearwards.

When the lighting is switched on automatically (with AUTO model), the dipped headlamps and sidelamps remain on until the rear foglamp is switched off.

front and rear foglamps

The rear foglamp operates with the dipped beam and main beam head-lamps.

The front foglamps also operate with the sidelamps.

To switch on the rear foglamp, turn the ring C forwards.

To switch on the front foglamps, turn the ring C forwards again.

To switch off the rear foglamp, turn the ring C rearwards.

To switch off the front foglamps, turn the ring C rearwards again.

When the lighting is switched on automatically (with AUTO model), the dipped headlamps and sidelamps remain on until the rear foglamp is switched off. When the lighting is switched off automatically (with AUTO model) or when the dipped headlamps are switched off manually, the foglamps and the sidelamps will remain on.

In good or rainy weather, by both day and night, the front foglamps and the rear foglamp

are prohibited. In these situations, the power of their beams may dazzle other drivers.

Do not forget to switch off the front foglamps and the rear foglamp when they are no longer necessary.

Lighting on audible warning

When the ignition is switched off, all of the lamps switch off automatically, unless guide-me-home lighting is activated.

If the lighting is switched on manually after switching off the ignition, there is an audible signal when a front door is opened to warn the driver that they have forgotten to switch off the vehicle's lighting, with the ignition off.

In some weather conditions (e.g. low temperature or humidity), the presence of misting on the internal surface of the glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is normal; it disappears after the lamps have been on for a few minutes.

Daytime running lamps

System which permits switching on of the special lamps at the front (low power), so that you can be seen during the daytime.

The daytime running lamps come on automatically when the vehicle is started, if fitted *.

The instruments and controls (multi-function screen, air conditioning control panel, ...) are not lit, except when the lighting is switched on manually or automatically.

Programming

In countries in which this function is not imposed by regulations, you can activate or deactivate it via the multifunction screen configuration menu.

In countries in which it is imposed by regulations:

• by default, this function is activated,
• the sidelamps and the number plate lamps are also switched on *.

* According to country.

Manual guide-me-home lighting

Temporarily keeping the dipped beam headlamps on after the vehicle's ignition has been switched off makes the driver's exit easier when the light is poor.

Abstract line drawing of a stylized human figure with a magnifying glass highlighting the eye (no text or symbols)

Switching on

With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps using the lighting stalk.
A further "headlamp flash" switches the function off.

Switching off

The manual guide-me-home lighting switches off automatically after a set time.

EXTERIOR WELCOME LIGHTING

The remote switching on of the lighting makes your approach to the vehicle easier in poor light. It is activated according to the level of light detected by the sunshine sensor.

Switching on

Press the open padlock on the remote control.

The dipped beam headlamps and the sidelamps come on; your vehicle is also unlocked.

Switching off

The exterior welcome lighting switches off automatically after a set time, when the ignition is switched on or on locking the vehicle.

Programming

The lighting duration is selected via the vehicle configuration menu.

The duration of the welcome lighting is associated with and identical to that of the automatic guide-me-home lighting.

Automatic illumination of headlamps

The sidelamps and dipped beam head-lamps are switched on automatically, without any action on the part of the driver, when a low level of external light is detected or in certain cases of activation of the windscreen wipers.

As soon as the brightness returns to a suffi cient level or after the windscreen wipers are switched off, the lamps are switched off automatically.

AUTO 800#

Activation

Turn the ring to the "AUTO" position. The automatic illumination of headlamps is accompanied by a message in the screen.

Deactivation

Turn the ring to another position. Deactivation is accompanied by a message in the screen.

Associated with the automatic "Guide-me-home" lighting

Association with the automatic lighting provides the "guide-me-home" lighting with the following additional options:

selection of the lighting duration of 15, 30 or 60 seconds in the vehicle parameters in the vehicle configuration menu,

- automatic activation of "guide-me-home" lighting when automatic lillumination of headlamps is in operation.

Operating fault

In the event of a malfunction of the sunshine sensor, the lighting comes on, this warning lamp is displayed in the instrument panel

and/or a message appears in the screen, accompanied by an audible signal.

Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor may detect sufficient light. In this case, the lighting will not come on automatically.

Do not cover the sunshine sensor, coupled with the rain sensor and located in the centre of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror; the associated functions would no longer be controlled.

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF HALOGEN HEADLAMPS

Interior view of a car dashboard with a control panel and infotainment (no visible text or symbols)

To avoid causing a nuisance to other road users, the height of the halogen headlamps should be adjusted according to the load in the vehicle.

1. 1 or 2 people in the front seats.
   -. 3 people.
2. 5 people.
3. Intermediate setting.
4. 5 people + maximum authorised load.
5. Intermediate setting.
6. Driver + maximum authorised load.

The initial setting is position "0".

AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF THE XENON HEADLAMPS

AUTO

In order to avoid causing a nuisance to other road users, this system corrects the height of the xenon headlamps beam automatically and when stationary, in relation to the load in the vehicle.

If a malfunction occurs, this warning lamp is displayed on the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message on the multifunction screen.

The system then places your headlamps in the lowest position.

If a malfunction occurs, do not touch the xenon bulbs. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

DIRECTIONAL LIGHTING

When the dipped or main beam head-lamps are on, this function enables the light beams to provide improved lighting of the side of the road when cornering.

The use of this function, from approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) and associated with the xenon headlamps only, considerably improves the quality of your lighting when cornering.

with directional lighting

Illustration of a car with red light illuminating the side of a road, and a cyclist riding on a curved path (no text or symbols)

without directional lighting

Rear view of a silver SUV driving on a curved road with a motorcyclist nearby (no text or symbols visible)

Programming

The function is activated or deactivated via the vehicle configuration menu.

Operating fault

If a fault occurs, this warning lamp fl ashes in the instrument panel, accompanied by a message in the screen.

Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

When stationary or moving at very low speed or when reverse gear is engaged, the function is inactive.

The status of the function remains in the memory when the ignition is switched off.

WIPER CONTROLS

System for selection and control of the various front and rear wiping modes for the elimination of rain and cleaning.

The vehicle's front and rear wipers are designed to improve the driver's visibility progressively according to the climatic conditions.

Prgramming

Various automatic wiper control modes are also available according to the following options:

• automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers,
• rear wiping on engaging reverse gear.

Model with intermittent wiping

Diagram showing a mechanical component with labeled directional arrows and a circular symbol 'A' pointing to it.

Model with AUTO wiping

Diagram showing a car's left-hand rule with directional arrows and a 'AUTO' button, likely illustrating vehicle control or navigation.

Manual controls

The wiper commands are issued directly by the driver by means of the stalk A and the ring B.

Windscreen wipers

A. Wiping speed selection stalk:

2 fast (heavy rain),
1 normal (moderate rain),
I intermittent (proportional to the speed of the vehicle),
0 park,
single wipe (press down and release),

or

AUTO ↓ automatic, then single wipe (see following page).

Rear wiper

Diagram showing car control panel with labeled buttons and directional arrows, including a hand pointing to the lock.

B. Rear wiper selection ring:

park,

intermittent wipe,

wash-wipe (set duration).

Reverse gear

When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper will come into operation if the windscreen wipers are operating.

Programming

The function is activated or deactivated via the multifunction screen configuration menu.

This function is activated by default.

Windscreen and headlamp wash

Diagram of a car interior with a red upward arrow and a black vehicle icon, no text or symbols present.

Pull the windscreen wiper stalk towards you. The windscreen wash then the windscreen wipers operate for a fixed period.

The headlamp washers only operate when the dipped beam headlamps are on.

Screenwash/headlamp wash low level

In the case of vehicles fitted with headlamp washers, when the minimum level of the reservoir is reached, this warning lamp is

displayed in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen.

The warning lamp is displayed when the ignition is switched on, or every time the stalk is operated, until the reservoir is refi lled.

Next time you stop, refill the screen-wash/headlamp wash reservoir.

If a significant accumulation of snow or ice is present, or when using a bicycle carrier the boot, deactivate the auto-rear wiper via the multifunction in configuration menu.

Automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers

The windscreen wipers operate automatically, without any action on the part of the driver, if rain is detected (sensor behind the rear view mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity of the rainfall.

0 ↓ AUTO

Activation

This is controlled manually by the driver by pushing the stalk downwards to the "AUTO" position.

It is accompanied by a message in the screen.

AUTO I +↓ O

Switching off

This is controlled manually by the driver by moving the stalk upwards then returning it to position "0".

It is accompanied by a message in the screen.

The automatic rain sensitive wipers must be reactivated if the ignition has been off for

more than one minute, by pushing the stalk downwards.

Operating fault

If an automatic wiping malfunction occurs, the wipers will operate in intermittent mode.

Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with the sunshine sensor and located in the centre

of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror.

Switch off the automatic rain sensitive wipers when using an automatic car wash.

In winter, to avoid damaging the wiper blades, it is advisable to wait until the windscreen is completely clear of ice before activating the automatic rain sensitive wipers.

Special position of the windscreen wipers

Diagram of a car with two red arrows indicating direction, no text or symbols present

This position permits release of the windscreen wiper blades.

It is used for cleaning or replacement of the blades. It can also be useful, in winter, to detach the blades from the windscreen.

Any action on the wiper stalk immediately after switching off the ignition places the blades vertically on the screen.

To park the blades again, switch on the ignition and operate the wiper stalk.

To maintain the effectiveness of the "fl at-blade" type of wiper blades, it is advisable to:

• handle them with care,
• clean them regularly using soapy water,
• avoid using them to retain cardboard on the windscreen,
• replace them at the first signs of wear.

COURTESY LAMPS

2 1 2

1. Front courtesy lamp
2. Map reading lamps

2 3 2 3

1. Rear courtesy lamp

Front and rear courtesy lamps

In this position, the courtesy lamp comes on gradually:

• when the vehicle is unlocked,
• when the key is removed from the ignition,
• when a door is opened,
• when the remote control locking button is activated, in order to locate your vehicle.

It switches off gradually:

• when the vehicle is locked,
• when the ignition is switched on,
• 30 seconds after the last door is closed.

Permanently off.

Permanent lighting.

With the permanent lighting mode, the lighting time varies according to the circumstances:

• with the ignition off, approximately ten minutes,
• in energy economy mode, approximately thirty seconds,
• with the engine running, unlimited.

When the front courtesy lamp is in the "permanent lighting" position, the rear courtesy will also come on, unless it is in permanently off" position.

To switch off the rear courtesy lamp, place it in the "permanently off" position.

Map reading lamps

With the ignition on, press the corresponding switch.

Take care not to place anything in contact with the courtesy lamps.

DOOR MIRROR SPOTLAMPS

3D rendering of a handheld device with a yellow laser beam, no visible text or symbols

To make your approach to the vehicle easier, these illuminate:

• the zones facing the driver's and passenger's doors,
• the zones forward of the door mirrors and rearward of the front doors.

Switching on

The spotlamps come on:

• when you unlock the vehicle,
• when you remove the key from the ignition,
• when you open a door,
• when you use the remote control.

Switching off

They are timed to go off automatically.

INTERIOR WELCOME LIGHTING

The remote switching on of the passenger compartment lighting makes your approach to the vehicle easier in poor light. It operates with the automatic illumination of headlamps.

Switching on

Press the open padlock on the remote control.

The courtesy lamps come on; your vehicle is also unlocked.

Switching off

The interior welcome lighting switches off automatically after a set time or when one of the doors is opened.

Programming

The function is activated or deactivated via the multifunction screen configuration menu.

The duration of the welcome lighting is associated with and identical to that of the automatic guide-me-home lighting.

INTERIOR MOOD LIGHTING

The dimmed passenger compartment lighting improves visibility in the vehicle when the light is poor.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Switchig on

At night, the front courtesy lamp mood lamp A comes on automatically when the sidelamps are switched on.

Switchig off

The interior mood lighting switches off automatically when the sidelamps are switched off.

FOOTWELL LIGHTING

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

The soft lighting provided by the footwell lamps improves visibility in the vehicle when the light is poor.

Activation

Its operation is identical to that of the courtesy lamps. The lighting comes on when one of the doors is opened.

BOOT LAMP TORCH

Diagram of a vehicle interior with a red arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols present)

This comes on automatically when the boot is opened and switches off automatically when the boot is closed.

Different lighting times are available:

• when the ignition is off, approximately ten minutes,
• in energy economy mode, approximately thirty seconds,
• when the engine is running, no limit.

Diagram of a car interior with a red arrow pointing to a battery symbol (no text or labels)

Portable lamp, fitted in the boot wall, which can be used to light the boot or as a torch.

For the torch function, refer to the "Fittings - § Torch" section.

Operation

Once engaged firmly in its location, it comes on automatically when the boot is opened and switches off automatically when the boot is closed.

It operates with NiMH type rechargeable batteries.

It has a battery life of approximately 45 minutes and recharges while you are driving.

Observe the polarities when fitting the rechargeable batteries.

Never replace the rechargeable batteries with normal single-use batteries.

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components for identification and labeling.

INTERIOR FITTINGS

1. Spectacles storage
2. Sun visor
3. Grab handle with coat hook
4. Storage compartment
5. Storage compartment under the steering wheel
6. Storage compartment
7. Illuminated glove box
8. Door pockets
9. Front 12 V accessory socket (120 W)
10. Storage compartment
11. Peugeot Connect USB
12. Cup holder
13. Rear 12 V accessory socket (120 W)

SUN VISOR

Diagram of a car frontview door with a blue arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Component which protects against sunlight from the front or the side, also equipped with an illuminated courtesy mirror.

With the ignition on, raise the concealing flap; the mirror is lit automatically.

This sun visor is also equipped with a ticket holder.

DRIVER'S STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

3D rendered mechanical component with a blue arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Storage box

This has storage areas for the handbook pack, ...

To open, pull the handle then tilt the box.

Card holder

This can be used for a toll payment ticket or parking card, for example.

Coin storage

Storage

ILLUMINATED GLOVE BOX

3D rendered mechanical component with a blue arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

This has storage areas, audio sockets for a portable player and a location for the SIM card (only with Peugeot Connect Media), ...

To open the glove box, raise the handle.

The lamp comes on when the lid is opened.

To connect a portable player or a SIM card, refer to the "Audio and telematics" section.

CENTRE CONSOLE

Storage device for the driver and front passenger.

Storage

Diagram of a car intake manifold with a blue arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Slide the cover for access to the 10.5 litre storage compartment.
This can contain 2 half-litre bottles.
A ventilation outlet distributes cooled air.

PEUGEOT CONNECT USB

Diagram showing three labeled buttons inserted into a device panel, with a cursor pointing to the button (no text or symbols present)

This connection box consists of a jack auxiliary socket and/or a USB port.
It permits the connection of portable equipment, such as a digital audio player of the iPod ^® type or a USB memory stick. It reads the audio file formats (mp3, ogg, wma, wav...) which are transmitted to your audio equipment and played via the vehicle's speakers.
You can manage these files using the steering mounted controls or the audio equipment control panel and display them on the multifunction screen.

When it is in use, the portable equipment charges automatically.

For more information on the use of this equipment, refer to the Peugeot Connect Sound part of the "Audio and Telematics" section.

12 V ACCESSORY SOCKETS

Line drawing of a mechanical component with blue arrows pointing to features (no text or symbols)

To connect a 12 V accessory (max power: 120 Watts), remove the cover and connect a suitable adaptor.
Exceeding the maximum power could result in damage to your accessory.

MATS

Removable carpet protection.

Diagram of a mechanical component with two blue arrows indicating direction, surrounded by gray lines (no text or symbols)

Fitting

When fitting the mat for the first time, on the driver's side use only the fixings provided in the wallet attached.

The other mats are simply placed on the carpet.

Refitting

To refi t the mat on the driver's side:

position the mat correctly,
refit the fixings by pressing,
check that the mat is secured correctly.

To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:

• only use mats which are suited to the fi xings already present in the vehicle; these fi xings must be used,
• never fit one mat on top of another.
  The use of mats not approved by PEUGEOT may interfere with access to the pedals and hinder the operation of the cruise control/speed limiter.

Removal

To remove the mat on the driver's side:

move the seat as far back as possible,
unclip the fixings,
remove the mat.

"AIRCRAFT" TYPE TABLES

Installed on the back of each front seat, these allow you to set down objects.

Diagram showing two seats with blue directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols)

To use the table, lower it fully until it locks in the low position.

To store the table, raise it, passing the point of resistance, to the high position.

On the passenger side, do not forget to fold the "aircraft" type table before placing the seat in the table position.

Do not place hard or heavy objects on the table. They could become dangerous projectiles in the event of emergency braking or impact.

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS UNDER THE REAR FOOTWELLS

3D mechanical component with directional arrow and letter A, no readable text or symbols

Depending on the configuration, the vehicle has storage compartments under the footwells, located forward of the outer rear seats. Access is via clipped fl aps with a handle A.

STORAGE DRAWER

Diagram of a car seatbelt with airflow lines and a blue arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

It is located under the driver's seat (manual adjustment).

Opening

Raise the front of the drawer and pull it.

Do not place heavy objects in the drawers.

REAR MULTIMEDIA

Multimedia system permitting the connection of any external portable system: iPod Video, games consoles, DVD player, ...

Two separate video sources can be connected via the RCA connectors (yellow).

The video is displayed in two 7" screens, integrated in the head restraints.

Two separate audio sources can be connected via the RCA connectors (red and white).

The audio is heard through two wireless headphones with Bluetooth technology which operate with rechargeable batteries.
The A/B button allows you to pair the headphones with the screen: A left-hand side, B right-hand side.
You have a 12 V charger with two outputs permitting simultaneous charging of both headphones.
It is also possible to connect a 3rd set of Bluetooth headphones.

Set-up

With the engine running, connect your portable system to the RCA connectors (e.g. with AV1 on the left).
Press the system's ON/OFF button, the indicator lamp comes on and the AV1 indicator lamps come on.
Press and hold the ON/OFF button on the headphones, the indicator lamp on the headphones fl ashes in blue.
Press and hold the system's ON/OFF button, the pairing with the headphones is complete when the blue indicator lamps on the headphones and on the system (in the shape of headphones) are on continuously.
Press the ON/OFF buttons in the screens if you have a video source.
Start playing your portable system.

Illustration of a medical or electronic device with a screen and buttons, no visible text or symbols

If your seat is in the table position, position a cover to avoid damaging the screen.

These covers also conceal each screen.

PANORAMIC SUNROOF

Component which has a tinted glass panoramic surface to increase the light and visibility in the passenger compartment.

Fitted with an electric blind in several sections to improve temperature and noise related comfort.

Diagram showing a vehicle interior with labeled point 'A' and a control panel icon

One-touch electric blind

There are two options for opening and closing:

- manual mode

√ Pull or press control A gently. The blind stops when you release the control.

Illustration of a blue arrow pointing diagonally on a green rectangular object, surrounded by abstract geometric patterns (no text or symbols)

automatic mode

Pull or press control A firmly. One press opens or closes the blind completely. Pressing the control again stops the blind.

Safety anti-pinch

In automatic mode and at the end of its travel, if the blind meets an obstacle while closing it stops and moves back slightly.

Reinitialisation: if the blind's supply is cut off while it is moving, the safety anti-pinch must

ing, the safety anti-pinch must initialised:

press the control until the blind is fully closed,
continue to press for at least 3 seconds. A slight movement of the blind will then be noticeable, confi rming the reinitialisation.

If the blind re-opens during a closing manoeuvre, and immediately after it stops:

pull the control until the blind is fully open,

press the control until the blind is fully closed.

The safety anti-pinch function is not operational during these operations.

If the blind meets an obstacle during operation, you must reverse the movement of the

blind. To do this, press the control concerned.

When the driver operates the blind control, he must ensure that no one is preventing correct closing of the blind.

The driver must ensure that passengers use the blind correctly.

Be aware of children when operating the blind.

Technical diagram of a car rearview structure with numbered components and close-ups of internal compartments

BOOT FITTINGS (5 SEAT VERSION)

1. Load space cover
2. Hooks
3. 12 V accessory socket (120 W)
4. Torch
5. Concertina boards
6. Stowing rings on the floor
7. Cup holder
8. Storage compartments or audio amplifi er
9. Storage compartment under the floor

Technical diagram of a car rear canopy with numbered component labels for identification

BOOT FITTINGS (7 SEAT VERSION)

1. Load space cover
2. Hooks
3. 12 V accessory socket (120 W)
4. Torch
5. Concertina boards
6. Stowing rings on the floor
7. Cup holder
8. Armrests
9. Storage compartments or audio amplifi er
10. 3rd row seat belt buckles

Roller load space cover

To remove the load space cover:

remove the load space cover guides from the rails on the boot pillars,
reel in the load space cover in its roller,

Abstract geometric shape with a blue arrow pointing downward, no text or symbols present

Close-up of a mechanical component with a blue arrow pointing to a section (no visible text or symbols)

Technical line drawing of a vehicle rear view showing structural components (no text or symbols)

pivot the ends of the roller upwards to release it,
remove the roller from its support.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a blue circular arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols visible)

Close-up of a mechanical component with a blue arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols visible)

To install the load space cover:

position one of the ends of the roller in its support,
insert the second end in its support,
^B pivot the ends of the roller downwards to secure it,
reel out the load space cover to the boot pillars,
insert the load space screen guides in the rails on the boot pillars.

To store the load space cover, roller uppermost and flap facing towards the inside of the vehicle:

place the right-hand end in its housing,
slide the left-hand end into the guide then into its housing,

secure the assembly by pivoting the ends downwards.

Mechanical component diagram showing a lever and pivot mechanism (no text or symbols)

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a lever and pivot mechanism (no text or labels)

If you use the 3 rd row seats (7 seat version), it is essential to store the roller in its housing.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a blue arrow indicating a downward motion (no visible text or symbols)

Close-up of a mechanical component with a blue arrow pointing to a rectangular component (no visible text or symbols)

The roller has two rings for fi xing the luggage retaining net depending on its location.

High load retaining net \*

Hooked onto the special upper and lower fi xings, this permits use of the entire loading volume up to the roof:

• behind the front seats (row 1) when the rear seats are folded.
• behind the rear seats (row 2).

When positioning the net, check that the strap loops are visible from the boot; this will slackening or tightening easier.

Diagram showing car seatbelt installation steps with numbered instructions for lane installation

Diagram showing a car seatbelt with numbered components and a close-up inset of the seatbelt component.

To use it in row 1:

fold the rear seats,
open the covers of the upper fixings 1,
unroll the high load retaining net,
position one of the ends of the net's metal bar in the corresponding upper fixing 1, then do the same with the other end,
slacken the straps fully,
fix the snap hook of each of the straps on the corresponding Top Tether ring 3 (located on the back of the folded rear side seats),
tighten the straps,
check that the net is hooked and tightened correctly.

Diagram of a vehicle roof structure with numbered components (no text or symbols)

To use it in row 2:

F roll up or remove the load space screen,
open the covers of the upper fixings 2,
unroll the high load retaining net,
F: position one of the ends of the net's metal bar in the corresponding upper fixing 2, then do the same with the other end,
fix the snap hook of each of the straps in the corresponding stowing ring 4,
tighten the straps,
check that the net is hooked and tightened correctly.

Luggage retaining net

Hooked onto the stowing rings on the floor and/or on the load space cover roller, the luggage retaining net available as an accessory enables you to secure your luggage.

There are 4 possible positions:

Interior view of a car cab with visible structural components and roof grilles (no text or symbols)

• fl at at the bottom of the boot,

Top-down view of a car trunk with a mesh canopy structure (no text or symbols visible)

• vertical at the back of the rear seats,

Cross-sectional diagram of a car trunk showing internal structural components (no text or labels)

• horizontal, level with the load space cover,

Top-down view of a car trunk with a mesh net covering the interior (no text or symbols visible)

• flat at the bottom of the boot and vertical at the back of the rear seats.

Hooks

Diagram of a car interior with a blue arrow pointing to the door (no text or symbols present)

The hooks permit the securing of shopping bags.

12 V accessory socket

Abstract geometric pattern with a blue arrow pointing downward on a gray background (no text or symbols)

To connect a 12 V accessory (max power: 120 W), remove the cap and connect an appropriate adaptor. Raise the concertina board to gain access to the storage box. Depending on the configuration, this
Turn the key to the ignition position. has areas for storing:

Storage box (5 seat version)

Interior view of a vehicle chassis showing engine compartment and battery pack (no text or symbols)

• a box of spare bulbs,
• a first aid kit,
• a tyre repair kit,
• two warning triangles,
• ...
  Turn the key to the ignition position.

Torch

This is a removable lamp, fitted in the boot wall, which can be used to illuminate the boot or as a torch.

For the boot lighting function, refer to the "Visibility - § Boot lamp" section.

Diagram of a battery holder with a blue arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Operation

This torch operates with NiMH type rechargeable batteries.

It has a battery life of approximately 45 minutes and charges while you are driving.

Observe the polarities when fi tting the batteries.

Never replace the rechargeable batteries with normal single-use batteries.

Two black flashlights with labeled parts A and B, showing internal components and blue directional arrows (no text or symbols on the devices themselves)

Use

Extract the torch from its location pulling the side of the torch A.
Press the switch, located on the back, to switch the torch on or off.
Unfold the support, located on the back, to set down and raise the torch; for example, when changing a wheel.

Storing

Put the torch back in place in its location starting with the narrow part B.
If you have forgotten to switch off the torch, this switches it off automatically.

It the torch is not engaged correctly, it may not charge and may not come on when the boot is opened.

Rear side blinds

Fitted on the rear windows, these protect your young children from the sun.

2 nd row

Diagram of a car interior with a blue arrow pointing to the door panel (no text or symbols)

Diagram showing a blue arrow pointing upward inside a gray square, overlaid on a vehicle or road map (no text or symbols)

3 rd row (7 seat version)

Pull the blind by the central tab.
Position the blind attachment on the hook.

GENERAL POINTS RELATING TO CHILD SEATS

Although one of PEUGEOT's main criteria when designing your vehicle, the safety of your children also depends on you.

For maximum safety, please observe the following recommendations:

• in accordance with European regulations, all children under the age of 12 or less than one and a half metres tall must travel in approved child seats suited to their weight, on seats fitted with a seat belt or ISOFIX mountings *,
• statistically, the safest seats your vehicle for carrying children are the rear seats,
• a child weighing less than 9 must travel in the "rearwards-facing" position both in the front and in the rear.

CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

"Rearwards-facing"

When a "rearwards-facing" child seat is installed on the front passenger seat, it is essential that the passenger airbag is deactivated. Otherwise, the child would risk being seriously injured or killed if the airbag were to inflate.

in kg OFF ON AIRBAG PASS

"Forwards-facing"

When a "forwards-facing" child seat is installed on the front passenger seat, adjust the vehicle's seat to the fully back and highest position with the seat back upright and leave the passenger's airbag activated.

OFF ON AIRBAG PASS

Passenger seat in the fully back and highest position.

PEUGEOT recommends that children should travel in the outer rear seats of your vehicle:

• "rearwards-facing" up to the age of 2,
• "forwards-facing" over the age of 2.

Ensure that the seat belt is correctly tensioned.

3D rendering of a car seat with purple arrows indicating upward movement (no text or symbols)

* The rules for carrying children are specific to each country. Refer to the legislation in force in your country.

ON AIRBAG PASS OFF

Passenger airbag OFF

Diagram showing a car interior with a highlighted car door and a close-up of a key inserted into the window (no text or symbols present)

AIRBAG PASS.

Refer to the advice given on the label present on both sides of the passenger's sun visor.

Interior view of a car showing a vehicle's rearview and dashboard with an upward arrow (no text or symbols)

To assure the safety of your child, you must deactivate the passenger's front airbag when you install a child seat in the rearwards facing position on the front passenger's seat.

Otherwise, there is a risk that the child could be seriously injured or killed if the airbag were deployed.

For more information on deactivating the airbag, refer to the "Safety" section then "Airbags".

CHILD SEATS RECOMMENDED BY PEUGEOT

PEUGEOT offers a complete range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat belt:

Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg		Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
	L1"RÖMER/BRITAX Baby-Safe Plus".Installed in the rearwards-facing position.		L2"RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX".
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
	L4"RECARO Start".		L5"KLIPPAN Optima".From the age of 6 years (approximately 22 kg),the booster is used on its own.
	L6"RÖMER KIDFIX"Can be secured using the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings.The child is restrained by the seat belt.

INSTALLING A CHILD SEAT WITH A STAY

Care must be taken when installing a child seat with stay (a drop down leg) in the vehicle. In particular you should look for the presence of a storage compartment below the rear seat footwells.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a hand operating a shaft with a red X mark indicating a component (no text or symbols present)

Do not place the stay on the storage compartment cover; it might break in a serious impact. Where the adjustments

of the stay allow it, we suggest two other possibilities for installation.

The centre rear seat does not have a storage compartment below the footwell. You can therefore easily fit a child seat with a stay, whether Isofi x or universal (installed using the 3 point seat belt).

Illustration of a hand using a tool to lift a car gear into a wash (no text or symbols)

At the bottom of the storage compartment

If the stay is long enough, you can adjust it so that it contact the bottom of the storage compartment. Remove all objects from the storage compartment before installing the stay.

Illustration of a hand using a tool to adjust or install a component, with no visible text or symbols.

Away from the storage compartment area

Another possibility, if the stay is long enough and can be inclined sufficiently (always by following the recommendations given the installation instructions for the child seat), is to position the stay so that it contacts the floor away from the storage compartment. Adjust the longitudinal position of the front or rear seat to obtain a satisfactory position for the stay away from the storage compartment.

If you cannot fit the stay in way described, we recommend that you do not fit a child seat with stay to this seat.

INSTALLING CHILD SEATS USING THE SEAT BELT

In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using a seat belt and universally approved (a) in accordance with the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.

Weight of the child and indicative age
Seat	Under 13 kg(groups 0 (b) and 0+)Up to approx 1 year	From 9 to 18 kg(group 1)1 to 3 years approx	From 15 to 25 kg(group 2)3 to 6 years approx	From 22 to 36 kg(group 3)6 to 10 years approx
Front passenger seat (c) with height adjuster	U (R)	U (R)	U (R)	U (R)
Front passenger seat (c) without height adjuster	X	X	X	X
5 seats (2 rows)
Outer rear seats	U*	U*	U*	U*
Centre rear seat	U	U	U	U

To install a child seat in a rear seat, facing forwards or backwards, slide the rear seat backwards sufficiently so that front seat backrest is not in the way.

* Precautions are required when fitting a child seat with a stay (or drop down leg). Refer to the page "Installing a child seat with a stay" for more information.

Weight of the child and indicative age
Seat		Under 13 kg(groups 0 (b) and 0+)Up to approx 1 year	From 9 to 18 kg(group 1)1 to 3 years approx	From 15 to 25 kg(group 2)3 to 6 years approx	From 22 to 36 kg(group 3)6 to 10 years approx
Front passenger seat (c) with height adjuster		U (R)	U (R)	U (R)	U (R)
Front passenger seat (c) without height adjuster		X	X	X	X
7 seats (3 rows)
Outer rear seats 2nd row		U*	U*	U*	U*
Centre rear seat 2nd row		U	U	U	U
Rear seats 3rd row		U	U	U	U
When the KIDDY Life (L3) is installed with its booster on the front passenger seat, the vehicle's seat must be adjusted to its maximum forwards position and the airbag must be deactivated.

a: universal child seat, child seat that can be installed in all vehicles using a seat belt.
b: group 0, from birth to 10 kg. Shells seats and baby carriers cannot be installed in the front passenger seat.
c: consult the legislation in force in your country before installing your child on this seat.
U: seat suitable for the installation of a child seat secured using a seat belt and universally approved, "rearwards-facing" and/or "forwards-facing".
U (R): idem U, with the vehicle's seat adjusted to the highest position.
L-: only the child seats indicated can be installed on the seat concerned (according to country).
X: seat position not suitable for installation of a child seat for the weight class indicated.
* Precautions are required when fitting a child seat with a stay (or drop down leg). Refer to the page "Installing a child seat with a stay" for more information.

ADVICE ON CHILD SEATS

The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the child's protection in the event of an accident.

Remember to fasten the seat belts or the child seat harnesses keeping the slack relative to the child's body to a minimum, even for short journeys.

When installing a child seat using the seat belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened correctly on the child seat and that it secures the child seat firmly on the seat of your vehicle. Move the seat forwards if necessary.

For optimum installation of the "forwards-facing" child seat, ensure that the back of the child seat is in contact with the back of the vehicle's seat and that the head restraint does not cause any discomfort.

If the head restraint has to be removed, ensure that it is stored or attached securely to prevent it from being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking.

Children under the age of 10 must not travel in the "forwards-facing" position on the front passenger seat, unless the rear seats are already occupied by other children, cannot be used or are absent.

Deactivate the passenger airbag when a "rearwards-facing" child seat is installed on the front seat.

Otherwise, the child would risk being seriously injured or killed if the airbag were to inflate.

Installing a booster seat

The chest part of the seat belt must be positioned on the child's shoulder without touching the neck.

Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt passes correctly over the child's thighs.

PEUGEOT recommends the use of a booster seat which has a back, fitted with a seat belt guide at shoulder level.

As a safety precaution, do not leave:

• a child or children alone and unsupervised in a vehicle,
• a child or an animal in a vehicle which is exposed to the sun, with the windows closed,
• the keys within reach of children inside the vehicle.

To prevent accidental opening of the doors and rear windows, use the "Child lock".

Take care not to open the rear windows by more than one third.

To protect young children from the rays of the sun, fi t side blinds on the rear windows.

"ISOFIX" MOUNTINGS

Your vehicle has been approved in accordance with the latest ISOFIX regulation s.

The seats, represented below, are fitted with regulation ISOFIX mountings:

There are three rings for each seat:
- two rings A, located between the vehicle seat back and cushion, indicated by a label,
- a ring B, behind the seat, referred to as the TOP TETHER for fixing the upper strap.

This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast, reliable and safe fi tting of the child seat in your vehicle.

The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two latches which are easily secured on the two rings A.

Top-down line drawing of a car with four cars positioned on the roof, no text or symbols present

5 seats

A A B

Top-down line drawing of a car with four wheels and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

7 seats

Some also have an upper strap which is attached to ring B.

To attach this strap, raise the vehicle seat's head restraint then pass the hook between its rods. Then fix the hook on ring B and tighten the upper strap.

The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the child's protection in the event of an accident.

For information regarding the ISOFIX child seats which can be installed in your vehicle, refer to the table showing the locations for installing ISOFIX child seats.

ISOFIX CHILD SEAT RECOMMENDED BY PEUGEOT AND APPROVED FOR YOUR VEHICLE

RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX

(size category B1)

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Installed only in the forwards-facing position.

Fitted with an upper strap to be secured on the upper ring B, referred to as the TOP TETHER.

Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying.

Adjust the front seat of the vehicle so that the child's feet do not touch the back of the seat.

This child seat can also be used on seats which are not fitted with ISOFIX mountings.

In this case, it must be attached to the vehicle seat using the three point seat belt.

Follow the instructions for fitting the child seat given in the seat manufacturer's installation guide.

SEATING POSITIONS FOR INSTALLING ISOFIX CHILD SEATS

In accordance with European Regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX mountings.

In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter between A and G, is indicated on the child seat next to the ISOFIX logo.

		Weight of the child /indicative age
		Less than 10 kg (group 0) Up to approx. 6 months		Less than 10 kg (group 0) Less than 13 kg (group 0+) Up to approx. 1 year			From 9 to 18 kg (group 1) From approx. 1 to 3 years
Type of ISOFIX child seat		Shell		"rearwards-facing"			"rearwards-facing"		"forwards-facing"
ISOFIX size category		F	G	C	D	E	C	D	A	B
Front passenger seat		X		X			X		X
5 seats (2 rows)
Outer rear seats		IL-SU*		IL-SU*			IL-SU*		IUF * IL-SU *
Centre rear seat		X		IL-SU			IL-SU		IUF IL-SU

* Precautions are required when fitting a child seat with a stay (or drop down leg). Refer to the page "Installing a child seat with a stay" for more information.
To install a child seat in a rear seat, facing forwards or backwards, slide the rear seat backwards sufficiently so that front seat backrest is not in the way.

		Weight of the child /indicative age
		Less than 10 kg (group 0) Up to approx. 6 months		Less than 10 kg (group 0) Less than 13 kg (group 0+) Up to approx. 1 year			From 9 to 18 kg (group 1) From approx. 1 to 3 years
Type of ISOFIX child seat		Shell		"rearwards-facing"			"rearwards-facing"		"forwards-facing"
ISOFIX size category		F	G	C	D	E	C	D	A	B	B1
Front passenger seat		X		X			X		X
7 seats (3 rows)
Outer rear seats 2nd row		IL-SU*		IL-SU*			IL-SU*		IUF * IL-SU *
Centre rear seat 2nd row		X		IL-SU			IL-SU		IUF IL-SU
Rear seats 3rd row		Not Isofix

* Precautions are required when fitting a child seat with a stay (or drop down leg). Refer to the page "Installing a child seat with a stay" for more information.

IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an Isofix Universal seat, "Forwards-facing" secured using the top belt.

IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an Isofix Semi-Universal seat either:

- "rearwards-facing" fitted with a top belt or a stay,

- "forwards-facing" fitted with a stay,

- a shell seat fitted with an upper strap or a stay.

For advice on securing of the top belt, refer to the paragraph "Isofix mountings".

X: seat not suitable for the installation of a child seat or shell for the weight group indicated.

MANUAL CHILD LOCK

Mechanical system to prevent opening of the rear door using its interior control.

The control is located on the edge of each rear door.

ELECTRIC CHILD LOCK

Remote control system to prevent opening of the rear doors using their interior controls and use of the rear electric windows.

Switching off

With the ignition on, press this button again.

The indicator lamp in the button goes off, accompanied by a message to confirm that the child lock is off.

This indicator lamp remains off while the child lock is switched off.

Locking

Diagram showing a key inserted into a car with labeled parts and warning symbols for safety warnings.

Turn the red control one eighth of a turn using the ignition key as shown in the label on the door. Check that the lock is on.

Unlocking

Turn the red control one eighth of a turn using the ignition key.

Switching on

Diagram showing car interior with dashboard, steering wheel, and control panel, alongside a close-up of the dashboard's steering wheel.

With the ignition on, press this button. The indicator lamp in the button comes on, accompanied by a message to confirm that the child lock is on.

This indicator lamp remains on until the child lock is switched off.

It is still possible to open the doors from the outside and operate the rear electric windows from the driver's control panel.

Any other status of the indicator lamp indicates a fault with the electric child lock.

Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

This system is independent and in no circumstances does it take the place of the central locking control.

Check the status of the child lock each time you switch on the ignition.

Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time.

In the event of a serious impact, the electric child lock is switched off automatically to permit the exit of the rear passengers.

DIRECTION INDICATORS

Diagram of a car's control panel with directional arrows and labeled buttons, showing icons for speed, speed limit, and ID.

Lower the lighting control stalk fully when moving to the left.

Raise the lighting control stalk fully when moving to the right.

If you forget to cancel the direction indicators for more than twenty seconds, the volume of dible signal will increase if the is above 40 mph (60 km/h).

"Motorway" function

Move the stalk briefly upwards or downwards, without going beyond the point of resistance; the corresponding direction indicators will flash 3 times.

HAZARD WARNING LAMPS

A visual warning by means of the direction indicators to alert other road users to a vehicle breakdown, towing or accident.

Diagram showing road intersection with traffic warning signs and vehicle icons, labeled 'A' in Chinese.

Tilt or press button A, the direction indicators flash.

They can operate with the ignition off.

Automatic operation of hazard warning lamps

When braking in an emergency, depending on the deceleration, the hazard warning lamps come on automatically. They switch off automatically the first time you accelerate.

You can also switch them off by pressing the button.

HORN

Audible warning to alert other road users to an imminent danger.

Diagram showing a central figure with green arrows pointing outward, surrounded by control panels (no text or symbols)

Press one of the spokes of the steering wheel.

Use the horn moderately and only in the following cases:

• immediate danger,
• overtaking a cyclist or pedestrian,
• when approaching an area where there is no visibility.

TYRE UNDER-INFLATION DETECTION

System which automatically checks the pressure of the tyres while driving.

Close-up of a car wheel with a green arrow pointing to the wheel rim (no text or symbols)

Sensors fitted in each valve trigger warning in the event of malfunction (speed above 12 mph (20 km/h)).

The spare wheel is not fitted with a sensor.

The tyre under-inflation detection system is an aid to driving which does not replace the for the driver to be vigilant or to responsibly.

Under-infl ated tyre

This warning lamp is displayed in the instrument panel and/or a message appears in the multifunction screen, accompanied by an audible signal, to identify the wheel concerned.

Check the tyre pressures as soon as possible.

This check must be carried out when the tyres are cold.

Puncture

STOP

The STOP warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen identifying the wheel concerned.

Stop as soon as it is safe to do so, avoiding any sudden movement of the steering wheel and the brakes.
Change the damaged wheel (punctured or very deflated tyre), and have the tyre pressure checked as soon as possible.

Sensor(s) not detected or faulty

A message appears in the multifunction screen, accompanied by an audible signal, to identify the wheel or wheels which are not detected or to indicate a fault in the system.

Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to replace the faulty sensor(s).

This message is also displayed when one of the wheels is away from the vehicle (being) or when one or more wheels at a sensor are fitted.

All repairs and changing of tyres on a wheel fitted with this system must be carried out by

a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

If, when changing a tyre, you install a wheel which is not detected by your vehicle (example: fi tting of snow tyres), you must have the system reinitialised by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

This system does not avoid the need to have the tyre pressures checked regularly (refer to the

"Identifi cation markings" section) to ensure that the optimum dynamic performance of the vehicle is maintained and prevent premature wear of the tyres, particularly in arduous driving conditions (heavy load, high speed).

The tyre pressures must be checked cold, at least once a month. Remember to check the pressure of the spare wheel.

The tyre under-inflation detection system may experience temporary interference due to electromagnetic emissions on a frequency close to that used by the system.

ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAMME (ESC)

Electronic Stability Programme (ESC: Electronic Stability Control) incorporating the following systems:

• the anti-lock braking system (ABS) and the electronic brake force distribution (EBFD),
• the emergency braking assistance,
• the anti-slip regulation (ASR) traction control,
• the dynamic stability control (DSC).

Definitions

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and electronic brake force distribution (EBFD)

This system improves the stability and manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking and offers improved control in corners, in particular on poor or slippery road surfaces.

The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of emergency braking.

The electronic brake force distribution system manages the braking pressure wheel by wheel.

Emergency braking assistance

In an emergency, this system enables you to reach the optimum braking pressure more quickly and therefore reduce the stopping distance.

It is triggered in relation to the speed at which the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an increase in the effectiveness of the braking.

Anti-skid regulation (ASR)

The ASR system (also known as Traction Control) optimises traction in order to avoid wheel slip by acting on the brakes of the driving wheels and on the engine. It also improves the directional stability of the vehicle on acceleration.

Dynamic stability control (DSC)

If there is a difference between the path followed by the vehicle and that required by the driver, the DSC monitors each wheel and automatically acts on the brake of one or more wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle to the required path, within the limits of the laws of physics.

Snow driving assistance (Intelligent Traction Control)

Your vehicle has a system to help driving on snow: Intelligent Traction Control.

This automatic system continuously checks for situations of diffi cult surface adhesion that could make it diffi cult to move off or make progress on deep fresh snow or compacted snow.

In these situations, Intelligent Traction Control limits the amount of wheel slip to provide the best traction and trajectory control.

In extremely severe conditions (deep snow, mud...), it can be useful to temporarily deactivate the ESP/ASR systems to allow a degree of wheel spin and so recover grip. It is recommended that the system be reactivated as soon as possible.

Snow tyres are strongly recommended on surfaces offering low levels of adhesion.

Operation

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and electronic brake force distribution (EBFD)

When this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message, it indicates that there is a fault

with the ABS, which could cause loss of control of the vehicle when braking.

When this warning lamp comes on, coupled with the

STOP warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal

and a message, it indicates that there is a fault with the electronic brake force distribution (EBFD), which could cause loss of control of the vehicle when braking.

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. In both cases, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

When changing wheels (tyres and rims), make sure that these are approved for your vehicle.

Normal operation of the ABS may make itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake pedal.

In emergency braking, press very firmly without releasing the pressure.

Abstract line drawing of a vehicle interior with no visible text or symbols

Dynamic stability control (DSC)

Diagram showing a black rectangular object with a green arrow pointing downward, surrounded by gray rectangular areas (no text or symbols)

Press the "ESP OFF" button.

Operating fault

If this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen, this indicates a malfunction of the system.

Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked.

Activation

This system is activated automatically each time the vehicle is started.

It comes into operation in the event of a grip or trajectory problem.

This is indicated by flashing of this warning lamp in the instrument panel.

Deactivation

In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft ground...), it may be advisable to deactivate the DSC system, so that the wheels can move freely and regain grip.

This warning lamp and the indicator lamp in the button come on: the DSC system no longer acts on the operation of the internal combustion engine.

Diagram of a black key inserted into a rectangular area with a green arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols present)

Reactivation

The system is reactivated automatically each time the ignition is switched back on or from 30 mph (50 km/h).

Press the "ESP OFF" button again to reactivate it manually.

The DSC system offers exceptional safety in normal driving, but this should not encourage the to take extra risks or drive at high

The correct functioning of the system depends on observation of the manufacturer's recommendations regarding the wheels (tyres and rims), the braking components, the electronic components and the PEUGEOT assembly and operation procedures.

After an impact, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

SEAT BELTS

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with black band and red end cap, no text or symbols present

Front seat belts

The front seat belts are fitted with a pretensioning and force limiting system.

This system improves safety in the front seats in the event of a front or side impact. Depending on the severity of the impact, the pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat belts against the body of the occupants.

The pretensioning seat belts are active when the ignition is on.

The force limiter reduces the pressure of the seat belt on the chest of the occupant, so improving their protection.

Fastening

Close-up of a car's seatbelt with a green arrow pointing to the wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the buckle.
Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly by pulling the strap.

Unfastening

Press the red button on the buckle.
Guide the seat belt as it reels in.

Height adjustment

Diagram showing car seatbelt with green directional arrows and label 'A' indicating a specific position

To adjust the anchorage point, squeeze the control A and slide it until you find a notch.

Front seat belt not fastened/unfastened warning lamp

When the ignition is switched on, this warning lamp comes on on the seat belt and passenger's front airbag warning

lamps display, if the driver and/or the front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.

From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) this warning lamp fl ashes for two minutes accompanied by an audible signal. Once these two minutes have elapsed, this warning lamp remains on until the driver and/or the front passenger fastens their seat belt.

Seat belt not fastened/unfastened warning lamps display

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    B --> C["3"]
    C --> D["4"]
    D --> E["5"]
    E --> F["6"]
    F --> G["7"]
    G --> H["8"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

1. Front and/or rear seat belts not fastened/unfastened warning lamp.
2. Front left seat belt warning lamp.
3. Front right seat belt warning lamp.
4. Rear right seat belt warning lamp.
5. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp.
6. Rear left seat belt warning lamp.

The corresponding warning lamp 2 or 3 comes on in red on the seat belt and passenger's front airbag warning lamps display if the seat belt is not fastened or is unfastened.

7 seat version

1. 6d row rear left seat belt warning lamp
2. 6d row rear right seat belt warning lamp.

Rear seat belts

The rear seats are each fitted with a three-point inertia reel seat belt with force limiter (with the exception of the centre rear seat).

Fastening

Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the buckle.
Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly by pulling the strap.

Unfastening

Press the red button on the buckle.
Guide the seat belt as it reels in.

Seat belt unfastened warning lamp

This warning lamp comes on on the seat belt and passenger's front airbag warning lamps display, when one or more rear

From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h), this warning lamp fl ashes for two minutes accompanied by an audible signal. Once these two minutes have elapsed, this warning lamp remains on until the one or more rear passengers fasten their seat belt.

Seat belt unfastened warning lamps display

Diagram of a car with numbered points and a vehicle icon, likely illustrating a road or navigation scenario.

When the ignition is switched on, with the engine running or when the vehicle is moving at less than 12 mph (20 km/h), the corresponding warning lamps 4 to 8 come on in red for approximately 30 seconds, if the seat belt is not fastened.

When the vehicle is moving at more than 12 mph (20 km/h), the corresponding warning lamp 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 comes on in red, accompanied by an audible signal and a message on the multifunction screen, if a rear passenger has unfastened their seat belt.

To prevent movement of the rear side seat belts in the 2nd row, slide the straps into the guides provided for this purpose.

2 nrbw rear centre seat belt

3rd row rear seatbelts (7 seat version)

The seat belt for the rear centre seat of the 2nd row is incorporated at the rear right of the roof.

The seat belts for the rear seats of the 3rd row are incorporated at the corner of the corresponding boot pillar and of the roof.

Diagram showing car interior with labeled points A and B, including a close-up of a device with a green leaf icon.

Installation

Pull the strap and insert the tongue A in the right-hand buckle.
Insert the tongue B in the left-hand buckle.
Check the fastening of each buckle by pulling the strap.

D C C D

Installation

Pull the strap and insert the tongue C in the buckle, on the boot side trim side.
Insert the tongue D in the opposite buckle.
Check the fastening of each buckle by pulling the strap.

Removal and storing

Press the red button on the buckle B, then on the buckle A.
Guide the strap as it reels in and bring the tongue B, then A onto the magnet of the attachment point on the roof.

Removal and storing

Press the red button on the buckle D, then on the buckle C.
Guide the strap as it reels in and the tongues D and C.

The driver must ensure that passengers use the seat belts correctly and that they are all need securely before setting off.

Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, always fasten your seat belt, even for short journeys.

Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as they will not fulfil their role fully.

The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel permitting automatic adjustment of the length of the strap to your size. The seat belt is stowed automatically when not in use.

Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt is reeled in correctly.

The lower part of the strap must be positioned as low as possible on the pelvis.

The upper part must be positioned in the hollow of the shoulder.

The inertia reels are fitted with an automatic locking device which comes into operation in the event of a collision, emergency braking or if the vehicle rolls over. You can release the device by pulling firmly on the strap and releasing it so that it reels in slightly.

In order to be effective, a seat belt must:

• be tightened as close to the body as possible,
• be pulled in front of you with a smooth movement, checking that it does not twist,
• be used to restrain only one person,
• not bear any trace of cuts or fraying,
• not be converted or modified to avoid affecting its performance.

In accordance with current safety regulations, for all repairs on your vehicle, go to a qualified workshop with the skills and equipment needed, which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide.

Have your seat belts checked regularly by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, particularly if the straps show signs of damage.

Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or a textile cleaning product, sold by PEUGEOT dealers.

After folding or moving a seat or rear bench seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned and reeled in correctly.

Recommendations for children

Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is less than 12 years old or shorter than one and a half metres.

Never use the same seat belt to secure more than one person.

Never allow a child to travel on your lap.

In the event of an impact

Depending on the nature and seriousness of the impact, the pretensioning device may be deployed before and independently of the airbags. Deployment of the pretensioners is accompanied by a slight discharge of harmless smoke and a noise, due to the activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system.

In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes on.

Following an impact, have the seat belts system checked, and if necessary replaced, by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

AIRBAGS

System designed to maximise the safety of the occupants (with the exception of the rear centre passenger) in the event of violent collisions. It supplements the action of the force-limiting seat belts (with the exception of the rear centre passenger).

If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors record and analyse the front and side impacts sustained in the impact detection zones:

• in the case of a serious impact, the airbags are deployed instantly and protect the occupants of the vehicle (with the exception of the rear centre passenger); immediately after the impact, the airbags deflate rapidly so that they do not hinder visibility or the exit of the occupants,
• in the case of a minor or rear impact or in certain roll-over conditions, the airbags will not be deployed; the seat belt alone is suffi cient to provide optimum protection in these situations.

The airbags do not operate when the ignition is switched off.

This equipment will only deploy once. If a second impact occurs (during the same or a subsequent accident), the airbag will not be deployed again.

Impact detection zones

A B B

A. Front impact zone.

B. Side impact zone.

Deployment of the airbag(s) is accompanied by a slight emission of harmless smoke and

a noise, due to the activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system.

This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive individuals may experience slight irritation.

The noise of the detonation may result in a slight loss of hearing for a short time.

Front airbags

System which protects the driver and front passenger in the event of a serious front impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the head and thorax.

The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.

Illustration of two identical eye sockets with visible surgical markings (no text or symbols)

Deployment

The airbags are deployed simultaneously, unless the passenger's front airbag is deactivated, in the event of a serious front impact to all or part of the front impact zone A, in the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the front to the rear of the vehicle.

The front airbag inflates between the thorax and head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard, passenger's side to cushion their forward movement.

Deactivation

Only the passenger's front airbag can be deactivated:

with the ignition off, insert the key in the passenger airbag deactivation switch,
turn it to the "OFF" position,
then, remove the key keeping the switch in the new position.

Diagram showing a car interior with a highlighted key and a numbered annotation indicating a location or feature.

According to version, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and/or in the seat belt and passenger's front airbag warning lamps display when the ignition is on and until the airbag is reactivated.

To assure the safety of your child, the passenger's front airbag must be deactivated when you install a "rear facing" child seat on the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the child would risk being seriously injured or killed if the airbag were deployed.

Reactivation

When you remove the child seat, turn the switch to the "ON" position to reactivate the airbag and so assure the safety of your front passenger in the event of an impact.

With the ignition on, this warning lamp comes on in the seat belt and passenger's front airbag warning lamps display for approximately one minute, if the passenger's front airbag is activated.

Operating fault

If this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible warning and a message in the screen, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked. The airbags may no longer be deployed in the event of a serious impact.

If this warning lamp flashes in the instrument panel and/or in the seat belt and passenger's front airbag warning lamps display, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. The passenger's front airbag may no longer be deployed in the event of a serious impact.

If even one of the two airbag warning lamps comes on continuously, do not install a child seat on the front passenger seat. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Lateral airbags

System which protects the driver and front passenger in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the chest.

Each lateral airbag is fitted in the front, in the outer side of the seat back frame.

AIRBAG

Deployment

The lateral airbags are deployed unilaterally in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle.

The lateral airbag inflates between the front occupant of the vehicle and the corresponding door panel.

Impact detection zones

A B B

A. Front impact zone.

B. Side impact zone.

Curtain airbags

System which protects the driver and passengers (with the exception of the rear centre passenger) in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the side of the head.

Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and the upper passenger compartment area.

Deployment

The curtain airbag is deployed at the same time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle.

The curtain airbag inflates between the front or rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.

Operating fault

If this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali-

fi ed workshop to have the system checked. The airbags may no longer be deployed in the event of a serious impact.

In the event of a minor impact or bump on the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle rolls over, the airbag may not be deployed.

In the event of a rear or front collision, the airbag is not deployed.

For the airbags to be fully Front airbags

effective, observe the following safety rules:

Sit in a normal upright position.

Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.

Do not leave anything between the occupants and the airbags (a child, pet, object...). This could hamper the operation of the airbags or injure the occupants.

After an accident or if the vehicle has been stolen or broken into, have the airbag systems checked.

All work on the airbag system must be carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Even if all of the precautions mentioned are observed, a risk of injury or of minor burns to the head, chest or arms when an airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The bag inflates almost instantly (within a few milliseconds) then deflates within the same time discharging the hot gas via openings provided for this purpose.

Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its spokes or resting your hands on the centre part of the wheel.

Passengers must not place their feet on the dashboard.

If possible, do not smoke as deployment of the airbags can cause burns or the risk of injury from a cigarette or pipe.

Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or hit it violently.

Lateral airbags

Use only approved covers on the seats, compatible with the deployment the lateral airbags. For information on the range of seat covers suitable for your vehicle, you can contact a PEUGEOT dealer (see "Practical information - § Accessories").

Do not fix or attach anything to the seat backs (clothing...). This could cause injury to the chest or arms if the lateral airbag is deployed.

Do not sit with the upper part of the body any nearer to the door than necessary.

Curtain airbags

Do not fix or attach anything to the roof. This could cause injury to the head if the curtain airbag is deployed.

If fitted on your vehicle, do not remove the grab handles installed on the roof, they play a part in securing the curtain airbags.

Top-down view of a car interior with a highlighted section labeled 'A' (no text or symbols beyond label)

The electric parking brake combines 2 operational modes:

Automatic application/release

Application is automatic when the engine stops, release is automatic on use of the accelerator (activated by default),

- Manual application/release The parking brake can be applied/released manually by pulling control lever A.

If this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, the automatic mode is deactivated.

Programming the mode

Depending on the country of registration of the vehicle, the automatic application when the engine is switched off and the automatic release when you press the accelerator can be deactivated.

Activation/deactivation of this function is possible by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

The parking brake is then applied and released manually. When the driver's door is opened, there is an audible signal and a message is displayed if the brake is not applied.

Deactivation is recommended in particularly cold conditions (ice) and during towing (breakdown, caravan...). Refer to the "Manual release" paragraph.

Illustration of a car interior with a red X mark on the door, no text or symbols present

Do not place any object (packet of cigarettes, telephone, ...) behind the electric brake control.

Manual application

Diagram of a car interior with labeled component 'A' (no text or symbols beyond label)

With the vehicle stationary, to apply the parking brake whether the engine is running or off, pull on the control lever A.

Application of the parking brake is confirmed by:

- illumination of the braking warning lamp and of the warning lamp P in the control lever A,

- display of the message "Hand-brake on".

When the driver's door is opened with the engine running, a beep is heard and a message is displayed if the parking brake has not been applied, unless the selector lever is in position P (Park) in the case of an automatic gearbox.

Before leaving the vehicle, check that parking brake warning lamp in the instrument panel is on, not flashing.

Manual release

With the ignition on or the engine running, to release the parking brake, press on the brake pedal or the accelerator, pull then release the control lever A.

Full application of the parking brake is confirmed by:

- the braking warning lamp and of the warning lamp P in the the control lever A going off,

- display of the message "Hand-brake off".

If you pull the control lever A without pressing the brake pedal, the parking brake will not be released and a warning lamp will come on in the instrument panel.

Maximum application

If necessary, you can make a maximum application of the parking brake. It is obtained by means of a long pull on the control lever A, until you see the message "Handbrake on" and a beep is heard.

Maximum application is essential:

• in the case of a vehicle towing a caravan or a trailer, if the automatic functions are activated but you are applying the parking brake manually,
• when the gradient you are parked on is variable in its effect (e.g. on a ferry, in a lorry, during towing).

In the case of towing, a loaded vehicle or parking on a gradient, make a maximum application of the parking brake then turn the front wheels towards the pavement and engage a gear when you park.

After a maximum application, the release time will be longer.

Automatic application, engine off

With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake is automatically applied when the engine is switched off.

The application of the parking brake is confirmed by:

- illumination of the braking warning lamp and of the warning lamp P in the control lever A,

- display of the message "Handbrake on".

An audible signal will confirm to you the application/release of your electric parking brake.

Before leaving the vehicle, check that parking brake warning lamp in the instrument panel is on (not flashing).

Never leave a child alone inside the vehicle with the ignition on, as they could release the parking brake.

In the case of towing, a loaded vehicle or parking on a gradient, turn the front wheels towards the pavement and engage a gear when you park.

Automatic release

The electric parking brake releases automatically and progressively when you press the accelerator:

Manual gearbox: press down fully on the clutch pedal, engage first gear or reverse, press on the accelerator pedal and move off.

Electronic gear control gearbox: select position A, M or R then press on the accelerator pedal.

e Automatic gearbox: select position D, M or R then press on the accelerator pedal.

Full release of the parking brake is confirmed by:

- the braking warning lamp and of the warning lamp P in the control lever A going off,

- display of the message "Handbrake off".

When stationary, with the engine running, do not press the accelerator pedal unnecessarily, as you may release the parking brake.

To immobilise the vehicle, engine running

With the engine running and the vehicle stationary, in order to immobilise the vehicle it is essential to manually apply the parking brake by pulling on control lever A.

The application of the parking brake is confirmed by:

- illumination of the braking warning lamp and the warning lamp P in the control lever A,

- display of the message "Hand-brake on".

When the driver's door is opened, an audible signal heard and a message is displayed if the parking brake has not been applied, unless the selector lever is in position P (Park) in the case of an automatic gearbox.

Label on the door panel

ATTENTION-WARNING-PELIGRO-AVVERTENZA-AKTUNG No pain is quitter the vehicle's absence of a fire from the stationnement est semi - voyant allure five Never have the vehicle without checking that the parking brake is applied - wuming ramp Oh permanently Nunce abandonar el vehicle sin veriflor que el trama de mano vest activado. But encendida y lita Prima al suendere dalla ventura verificare che il trama di riazionamento via inserto tipia accina fixata Tefraucog nie verlessen, ohne vorher zu prifer, ob die elektrache parkrione angovrogen in, De kontrolleudiche I wuchtit dann permanent

Before leaving the vehicle, check that parking brake warning lamp in the instrument panel is on, not flashing.

Particular situations

In certain situations (e.g. starting the engine), the parking brake can automatically alter its force. This is normal operation.

To advance your vehicle a few centimetres without starting the engine, but with the ignition on, press on the brake pedal and release the parking brake by pulling then releasing control lever A. The full release of the parking brake is confirmed by the warning lamp in the control lever A and the warning lamp in the instrument panel going off and the display of the message "Handbrake off".

If a parking brake fault occurs while applied or if the battery runs flat, an emergency release is always possible.

EMERGENCY BRAKING

Top-down view of a car interior with a highlighted component labeled 'A' (no text or symbols beyond label)

In the event of a failure of the main service brake or in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver taken ill, under instruction, etc) a continuous pull on the control lever A will stop the vehicle.

The electronic stability programme (ESP) provides stability during emergency braking.

If there is a fault with the emergency braking, one of the following messages will be displayed:

• "Parking brake faulty".
• "Parking brake control faulty".

If a failure of the ESP system is signalled by the illumination of this warning lamp, then braking stability is not guaranteed.

In this event, stability must be assured by the driver by repeating alternate "pull release" actions on control lever A.

The emergency braking must only be used in exceptional circumstances.

Emergency release

Diagram showing a car interior with labeled points B, C, and D, and an arrow indicating direction of movement.

Front left seat moved back fully.

In the event of the electric parking brake malfunctioning or the battery running fl at, an emergency manual device can release the parking brake.

"Immobilise the vehicle (or keep it stationary, if the brake pedal is pressed), with the engine running, by engaging first gear (manual gearbox), position P (automatic gearbox) or M or R (6-speed electronic gear control gearbox).
Switch off the engine but leave the ignition on. If it is impossible to immobilise the vehicle, do not operate the control and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop urgently.
Fetch the two vehicle blocks and the release device, located under the boot carpet (see "Changing a wheel" in the "Practical information" section).
Immobilise the vehicle by placing blocks in front and behind one of the front wheels.
Slide the front left-hand seat back as far as possible.
F Lift up the floor plug B in the carpet under the seat.
Pierce the protective cover C on the tube D with the release device.
Place the release device in the tube D.
Turn the release device clockwise. For safety reasons, it is essential to continue turning the device as far as it will go. The parking brake is released.

Remove the release device and store it with the blocks in the toolbox.

• The operation of the parking brake reinitialises when the ignition is switched off then on again. If the reinitialisation of the parking brake proves impossible, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
• The subsequent time required for application may be longer than during normal operation.

For safety reasons, you must contact a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible to replace the protective cover.

Following an emergency unlocking, immobilisation of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed once the manual emergency release has been deployed and the manual control does not allow the re-application of your parking brake.

Take no action, either on the control lever A, or stopping or starting the engine while the release device is engaged.

Take care not to allow moisture or dust in the proximity of the protective cover.

HILL START ASSIST

System which keeps your vehicle immobilised temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when starting on a gradient, the time it takes to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.

This system only operates when:

- the vehicle is completely stationary, with your foot on the brake pedal,

- in particular conditions on a slope, - with the driver's door closed.

The hill start assist system cannot be deactivated.

Operation

Side view of a light blue minivan on a road with a yellow directional arrow indicating left side (no text or symbols)

Illustration of a light blue minivan driving on a road with a yellow arrow indicating speed (no text or symbols)

On an ascending slope, with the vehicle stationary, the vehicle is held for a momentarily when you release the brake pedal:

• provided you are in first gear or neutral on a manual gearbox,
• provided you are in position A or M on an electronic gear control gearbox,
• provided you are in position D or M on an automatic gearbox.

On a descending slope, with the vehicle stationary and reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held momentarily when you release the brake pedal.

Do not exit the vehicle while it is being held in the hill start assist phase.

If you need to exit the vehicle with the engine running, apply the parking brake manually then ensure that the parking brake warning lamp (and the warning lamp P in the lever of the electric parking brake) are on fixed (not flashing).

Operating fault

If a fault in the system occurs, these warning lamps come on. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop sto have the system checked.

Operatig faults

If the electric parking brake fault warning lamp comes on together with one or more of the warning lamps presented in these tables, place the vehicle in a safe condition (on level ground, gear engaged) and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.

Situations	Consequences
Display of the message " Parking brake fault" and of the following warning lamps:	- The automatic functions are deactivated.- Hill start assist is not available.- The electric parking brake can only be used manually.
Display of the message " Parking brake fault" and of the following warning lamps:	- Manual release of the electric parking brake is only available by pressing the accelerator pedal and releasing the control.- Hill start assist is not available.- The automatic functions and the manual application are still available.
Display of the message " Parking brake fault" and of the following warning lamps: and possiblyfl ashing	- The automatic functions are deactivated.- Hill start assist is not available.To apply the electric parking brake: Immobilise the vehicle and switch off the ignition.Pull the control for at least 5 seconds or until application is complete.Switch on the ignition and check the switching on of the electric parking brake warning lamps.The application is slower than during normal operation.To release the electric parking brake:Switch on the ignition.Pull the control and hold it for approximately 3 seconds then release it.If the braking warning lamp is flashing or if the warning lamps do not come on with the ignition on, these procedures will not work. Place the vehicle on level ground and have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Display of the message " Parking brake control fault - auto parking brake activated " and of the following warning lamps: and possibly fl ashing	- Only the automatic application on switching off the engine and automatic release on acceleration functions are available. - The manual application/release of the electric parking brake and the emergency braking are not available.
Battery fault	- If the battery warning lamp comes on you must stop immediately as soon as the traffic allows. Stop and immobilise your vehicle (if necessary, place the two chocks under the wheels). - Apply the electric parking brake before switching off the engine.

HEAD-UP DISPLAY

Interior view of a car dashboard with a computer and directional arrow pointing to the dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

System which projects various information onto a transparent strip in the field of vision of the driver so that they do not have to take their eyes off the road.

This system operates when the engine is running and the settings are stored when the ignition is switched off.

Diagram showing a hand holding a red X mark on a map with a black device labeled '1' and an arrow indicating direction.

Buttons

Diagram showing car interior layout with numbered labels 1, 2, and 3 indicating seating or positioning points.

1. Head-up display on/off.
2. Brightness adjustment.
3. Display height adjustment.

The strip is activated by pressing one of the buttons.

Displays during operation

A B 42 um CRUSE 56 2.07 C CNR

Once the system has been activated, the following information is grouped together in the head-up display:

A. The speed of your vehicle.

B. Cruise control/speed limiter information.

C:"Distance alert" information (depending on version).

Activation/Deactivation

Diagram showing car seat positioning with numbered arrows and icons, likely illustrating vehicle positioning or seating arrangement.

With the engine running, press button 1. The activated/deactivated status when the engine was switched off is retained when the engine is switched on again.

Height adjustment

With the engine running, adjust the display to the required height using button 3:

• up to move the display up,
• down to move the display down.

Brightness adjustment

Diagram showing car interior with directional arrows and a numbered label '2' pointing to a vehicle component.

With the engine running, adjust the brightness of the information using button 2:

• up to increase the brightness,
• down to decrease the brightness.

We recommend that adjustments are only made using these buttons when the vehicle is stationary.

When stationary or while driving, no objects should be placed around the transparent strip (or on its cover) to avoid blocking the strip output and preventing its correct operation.

In certain extreme weather conditions (rain and/or snow, bright sunshine,) the head

up display may not be legible or may suffer temporary interference.

Certain glasses (sunglasses, spectacles or polarised lenses) may hamper reading of the information.

To clean the transparent strip, which is made of organic glass, use a clean, soft cloth (such as a spectacles cloth or microfi bre cloth). Do not use a dry or abrasive cloth or detergent or solvent products as these could scratch the strip or damage the anti-reflection coating.

DISTANCE ALERT \*

Driving aid which informs the driver of the time interval (in seconds) separating them from the vehicle in front when the driving conditions are stable.

It does not detect stationary vehicles and does not itself take any action on your vehicle's controls.

Illustration of two cars on a road with directional arrows and a clock in the background (no text or symbols)

For the safety time to be observed, refer to the current legislation or highway code recommendations in your country.

The system operates when the speed of your vehicle is higher than 45 mph (70 km/h) and below 90 mph (150 km/h).

It has a programmable visual alert which remains in the memory when the ignition is switched off.

This system is a driving aid and cannot, in any circumstances, take the place of the vigilance and responsibility of the driver.

Buttons

Diagram showing a vehicle parking lot with labeled lanes and icons, including a car icon and numbered annotations.

1. On/off.

2. Alert value increase (+)/decrease (-).

Displays during operation

The information is grouped together in the head-up display.

Once the system has been activated:

A. The speed of your vehicle is outside the operating range.
B. Your vehicle is within the operating range but no vehicle has been detected.
C. The vehicle in front of you has been detected.
The current time separating you from this vehicle is displayed permanently.
D. The time between your vehicle and the vehicle in front is less than the programmed alert value (it fl ashes).

Activation

Diagram showing car interior layout with numbered directional arrows and vehicle icons, likely illustrating a road or traffic flow system.

Press button 1, the indicator lamp comes on.
The system is activated but will only operate from 45 mph (70 km/h).

Programming the alert value

Select the alert value required using button 2, in steps of 0.1 second:

• up to increase: "+",
• down to decrease: "-".

Example with a value of 2 seconds:

30 SET2.0s

The alert value can be programmed to between 0.9 second and 2.5 seconds.
The visual alert can be deactivated by programming a value of 0 second.

Alert

1.0 1.15

When the time (in seconds) between your vehicle and the vehicle in front is less than the programmed time (alert value), a visual alert flashes.

A safety time of 2 seconds is recommended in normal driving conditions (correct traction and speed) to avoid

a collision in the event of emergency braking.

Deactivation

Press button 1 to deactivate the system, the indicator lamp goes off.

Reactivation

Press button 1 again to reactivate the system.

The last value programmed is retained and the indicator lamp comes on.

Operating limits

The system switches to standby automatically if the sensor does not detect the vehicle in front correctly (very diffi cult weather conditions, sensor out of adjustment, ...). A message is displayed in the multifunction screen.

The vehicle being followed may not be detected in certain conditions such as, for example:

• when turning,
• when changing lane,
• when the vehicle in front is either too far ahead (maximum range of the sensor: 100 m) or stationary (in a traffic jam, ...),

When the vehicle being followed is much too near (time between the two vehicles less than 0.5 seconds), the display remains fixed at 0.5 seconds.

If the indicator lamp in button 1 flashes, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

This system is not an anti-collision radar and it does not act of the movement of your vehicle. It provides information but cannot, in any circumstances, take the place of the vigilance and responsibility of the driver.

SPEED LIMITER

System which prevents the vehicle from exceeding the speed programmed by the driver.

When the programmed speed limit is reached, pressing the accelerator pedal no longer has any effect unless it is pressed fi rmly, which permits temporary exceeding of the programmed speed.

To return to the programmed speed, simply slow down to a speed below the programmed speed by releasing the accelerator.

The speed limiter is switched on manually: it requires a programmed speed of at least 20 mph (30 km/h).

The speed limiter is switched off by manual operation of the control.

The programmed speed remains in the memory when the ignition is switched off.

The speed limiter cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need to observe speed limits, nor can

it replace the need for vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver.

Steering mounted controls

Diagram showing car interior and steering wheel positions with numbered labels and directional arrows indicating movement or navigation.

The controls of this system are grouped together on stalk A.

1. Speed limiter mode selection dial
2. Programmed value decrease button
3. Programmed value increase button
4. Speed limiter on/off button

Displays in the instrument panel

Limit PAUSE 10 rpm 6 7 5 6 LIMIT 7.0 #PAUSE 5 6 7 5

The programmed information is grouped together on the instrument panel screen.

1. Speed limiter on/off indication

2. Speed limiter mode selection indication

3. Programmed speed value

This information also appears in the head-up display.

For more information on the head-up display, refer to the relevant page in this "Driving" section.

Programming

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    B --> C["3"]
    C --> D["4"]
    D --> E["5"]
    E --> F["6"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

Turn dial 1 to the "LIMIT" position: the speed limiter mode is selected but is not switched on (OFF).

You do not have to switch the speed limiter on in order to set the speed.

Set the speed value by pressing button 2 or 3 (e.g.: 55 mph (90 km/h)).

You can then change the programmed speed using buttons 2 and 3:

- by + or - 1 mph (km/h) = short press,

- by + or - 5 mph (km/h) = long press,

- in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h) = maintained press.

Switch the speed limiter on by pressing button 4.

Switch the speed limiter off by pressing button 4: the display confi rms that it has been switched off (OFF).

Switch the speed limiter back on by pressing button 4 again.

Exceeding the programmed speed

Pressing the accelerator pedal to exceed the programmed speed will not have any effect unless you press the pedal firmly past the point of resistance.

The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily and the programmed speed, which is still displayed, flashes.

Returning to the programmed speed, by means of intentional or unintentional deceleration of the vehicle, automatically cancels the flashing of the programmed speed.

Return to normal driving

Turn dial 1 to the "0" position: the speed limiter mode is deselected. The display returns to the distance recorder.

Operating fault

In the event of a speed limiter malfunction, the speed is cleared resulting in flashing of the dashes.

Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

On a steep descent or in the event of sharp acceleration, the speed limiter will not be

able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed.

To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:

• ensure that the mat is positioned correctly,
• do not fit one mat on top of another.

CRUISE CONTROL

System which automatically maintains the speed of the vehicle at the value programmed by the driver, without any action on the accelerator pedal.

The cruise control is switched on manually: it requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) and the engagement of:

• fourth gear on the manual gearbox,
• second gear in sequential mode on the electronic gear control gearbox or automatic gearbox,
• position A on the electronic gear control gearbox or D on the automatic gearbox.

The cruise control is switched off manually or by pressing the brake or clutch pedal or on triggering of the ESP system for safety reasons.

It is possible to exceed the programmed speed temporarily by pressing the accelerator pedal.

To return to the programmed speed, simply release the accelerator pedal.

Switching off the ignition cancels any programmed speed value.

Steering mounted controls

Diagram showing a car interior with numbered zones and directional arrows, alongside a map of the vehicle's dashboard and steering wheel.

The controls of this system are grouped together on stalk A.

1. Cruise control mode selection dial
2. Speed programming/programmed value decrease button
3. Speed programming/programmed value increase button
4. Cruise control off/resume button

The cruise control cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need to observe speed limits, nor can it replace the need for vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver.

Displays in the instrument panel

6 7 5 6 7 CRIUSE REPAUSE 70 MHz 5 6 7 5

The programmed information is grouped together in the instrument panel screen.

1. Cruise control off/resume indication
2. Cruise control mode selection indication
3. Programmed speed value

This information also appears in the head-up display. For more information on the head-up display, refer to the relevant page in this "Driving" section.

Programming

Diagram showing a car interior with numbered components and directional arrows indicating movement or flow.

Turn dial 1 to the "CRUISE" position: the cruise control mode is selected but is not switched on (OFF).
Set the programmed speed by accelerating to the required speed, then press button 2 or 3 (e.g.: 70 mph (110 km/h)).

OFF - km/h OFF mph 10 km/h 70 mph

You can then change the programmed speed using buttons 2 and 3:

• by + or - 1 mph (km/h) = short press,
• by + or - 5 mph (km/h) = long press,
• in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h) = maintained press.

Switch off the cruise control by pressing button 4: the display confi rms that it has been switched off (OFF).

Switch the cruise control back on by pressing button 4 again.

Exceeding the programmed speed

Intentional or unintentional exceeding of the programmed speed results in flashing of this speed in the screen.

Return to the programmed speed, by means of intentional or unintentional deceleration of the vehicle, automatically cancels the flashing of the speed.

Return to normal driving

Turn dial 1 to the "0" position: the cruise control mode is deselected. The display returns to the distance recorder.

Operating fault

In the event of a cruise control malfunction, the speed is cleared resulting in flashing of the dashes.

Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

OFF 1:10 km/h OFF 7:0 mph 1:10 km/h 7:0 mph 1:10 km/h 1:10 mph

When the cruise control is switched on, be careful if you maintain the pressure on one

of the programmed speed changing buttons: this may result in a very rapid change in the speed of your vehicle.

Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads or in heavy traffic.

On a steep descent, the cruise control will not be able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed.

To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:

• ensure that the mat is positioned correctly,
• never fit one mat on top of another.

Engaging 5th or 6th gear

Move the lever fully to the right to vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox. engage 5th or 6th gear.

GEAR EFFICIENCY INDICATOR \*

System which reduces fuel consumption by advising the driver to change up on

Engaging reverse gear

Diagram of a car gear shift lever with a yellow upward arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Raise the ring under the knob a move the gear lever to the left then forwards.

Operation

The system intervenes only when driving economically.

Depending on the driving situation and your vehicle's equipment, the system may advise you to skip one or more gears. You can follow this instruction without engaging the intermediate gears.

The gear recommended should not be considered compulsory. In fact, the confi guration of the road, the amount of traffic and safety remain determining factors when choosing the best gear. Therefore, the driver remains responsible for deciding whether or not to follow the advice given by the system.

This function cannot be deactivated.

Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.

As a safety precaution and to facilitate starting of the engine:

• always select neutral,
• press the clutch pedal.

In the case of driving which makes particular demands on the perfor-

mance of the engine (fi rm pres-

sure on the accelerator pedal, for example, when overtaking...), the system will not recommend a gear change.

The system never suggests:

• engaging fi rst gear,
• engaging reverse gear,
• engaging a lower gear.

Example:

- You are in third gear.

- You press the accelerator pedal moderately.

- The system may suggest that you engage a higher gear, if appropriate.

The information appears in the form of an arrow in the instrument panel screen.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, this arrow may be accompanied by the recommended gear.

This equipment will become available during the year.

* According to engine.

Six-speed electronic gear control gearbox which offers a choice between the comfort of fully automatic operation or the pleasure of manual gear changing.

Three driving modes are offered:

• automatic mode for automatic control of the gears by the gearbox,
• sequential mode for manual changing of the gears by the driver,
• auto sequential mode to overtake, for example, remaining in automatic mode while using the functions of the sequential mode.

A Sport function is available in automatic or sequential mode for a more dynamic style of driving.

Gear lever

M - R N A S

R. Reverse

With your foot on the brake, move the lever upwards to select this position.

N. Neutral.

With your foot on the brake, select this position to start.

A. Automatic mode.

Move the lever downwards to select this mode.
M. +/- Sequential mode with manual changing of the gears.
Move the lever downwards then to the left to select this mode, then:

- push the lever forwards to change up a gear,

- or pull the lever rearwards to change down a gear.

S. Sport function.

Press this button to activate or deactivate this function.

Steering mounted controls

Interior view of a car steering wheel with two circular indicators (one positive, one negative) on the steering wheel (no text or symbols)

+. Change up paddle to the right of the steering wheel.

Press the back of the "+" steering mounted paddle to change up a gear. - Change down paddle to the left of the steering wheel.
Press the back of the "-" steering mounted paddle to change down a gear.

The steering mounted paddles cannot be used to select neutral or engage or disengage reverse gear.

Displays in the instrument panel

Diagram illustrating a mechanical or electromagnetic device with labeled components including magnet, coil, and compass needle

Gear lever positions

N. Neutral

R. Reverse

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. Gears in sequential mode

AUTOThis comes on when the automatic mode is selected. It goes off on changing to sequential mode.

S. Sport (Sport function)

Place your foot on the brake when this warning lamp fl ashes (e.g.: when starting the engine).

There is an audible signal when reverse gear is engaged.

Moving off

Select position N.

Press the brake pedal down fully.
Start the engine.

N appears in the instrument panel screen.

If position R, A or M is selected, even with the engine at idle, if the brakes are released the vehicle moves without any action on the accelerator. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle when the engine is running. When carrying out maintenance on the vehicle with the engine running, apply the parking brake and select position N.

N flashes in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in multifunction screen, if the gear is not in position N on starting. Foot on brake flashes in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen, if the brake pedal is not pressed on starting.

Keep your foot on the brake pedal, move the gear lever to position A or M to go forwards, or R to go backwards.
Take your foot off the brake pedal, gear. you can then move off.
The parking brake is released automatically, otherwise release it manually.
gear.
gear.
gear.
gear.
gear.
gear.
gear.
gear.
gear.
gear.
gear.
gear.
gear.
geal
geal
geal
geal
geal

AUTO and 1 or R appear in the instrument panel screen.

Sequential mode

When the vehicle has moved off, select position M to change to sequential mode.

AUTO disappears and the gears engaged appear in succession in the instrument panel screen.

The gear change requests are only carried out if the engine speed permits.
It is not necessary to release the accelerator during gear changes.
When braking or slowing down, the gearbox changes down automatically to allow vehicle to pull away in the correct

At very low speed, if reverse gear is requested, this will only be taken into account when

the vehicle is immobilised. The Foot on brake warning lamp may flash in the instrument panel to prompt you to brake.

At high speed, if reverse gear is requested, the N indicator lamp will fl ash and the gearbox will change to neutral automatically. To engage a gear again, return the lever to position A or M.

On sharp acceleration, the gearbox will not change up unless the driver acts on the

gear lever or the steering mounted paddles.

Never select neutral N while the vehicle is moving.

Only engage reverse gear R when the vehicle is immobilised with the brake pedal pressed.

Automatic mode

Following use of the sequential This mode enables you to overtake, for mode, select position A to return to example, remaining in automatic mode the automatic mode. while using the functions of the sequen-

AUTO and the gear engaged appear in the instrument panel screen.

The gearbox is then operating in auto-active mode, without any action on the part of the driver. It continuously selects the most suitable gear in relation to the following parameters:

- style of driving, - profi le of the road.

For optimum acceleration, for example when overtaking another vehicle, press the accel-

erator pedal firmly past the point of resistance.

"Auto sequential mode"

I This mode enables you to overtake, for example, remaining in automatic mode while using the functions of the sequential mode.

Operate the + or - steering mounted paddle.

The gearbox engages the gear requested if the engine speed permits. AUTO is still displayed in the instrument panel.

After a few moments without any action on the controls, the gearbox resumes automatic control of the gears.

Sport function

Following selection of the sequential mode or automatic mode, press button S to activate the Sport function which offers you a more dynamic style of driving.

S appears next to the gear engaged in the instrument panel screen.

Press button S again to deactivate the function.

S is then cleared from the instrument panel screen.

The gearbox returns to normal mode automatically each time the ignition is switched off.

Stopping the vehicle Operatin

Before switching off the engine, you can choose to:

- move to position N to engage neutral, - leave the gear engaged; in this case, it will not be possible to move the vehicle.

In both cases, it is essential that you apply the parking brake to immobilise the vehicle.

When immobilising the vehicle, with the engine running, it is essential to place the gear in neutral N.

Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment, check that the gear lever is in neutral N and that the parking brake is applied.

g fault

With the ignition on, if this warning lamp comes on and AUTO flashes, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction

screen, this indicates a fault with the gearbox.

Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer. or a qualified workshop.

It is essential to press the brake pedal when starting the engine.

When parking, is it essential to apply the parking brake to immobilise the vehicle, whatever the circumstances.

"PORSCHE TIPTRONIC SYSTEM" AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

Six speed automatic gearbox which offers a choice between the comfort of fully automatic operation, enhanced by sport and snow programmes, or manual gear changing.

Four driving modes are offered:

• automatic operation for electronic management of the gears by the gearbox,
• sport programme for a more dynamic style of driving,
• snow programme to improve driving when traction is poor,
• manual operation for sequential changing of the gears by the driver.

Gear selection gate

1 2 3

1. Gear lever.
2. Button "S" (sport).
3. Button "*" (snow).

Gear lever

3D rendered mechanical component with a lever and gear-like base (no text or symbols visible)

P. Park.

• Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake on or off.
• Starting the engine.

R. Reverse.

- Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle stationary, engine at idle.

N. Neutral.

• Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake on.
• Starting the engine.
  D. Automatic operation.

M +/-. Manual operation with sequential changing of the six gears.

Press forwards to change up through the gears.

or

Press rearwards to change down through the gears.

Displays in the instrument panel

P ON/O OMO

When you move the lever in the gate to select a position, the corresponding indicator is displayed in the instrument panel.

P. Park
R. Reverse
N. Neutral
D. Drive (Automatic driving)
S. Sport programme

*. Snow programme

1 to 6. Gear engaged during manual operation

-. Invalid value during manual operation

Movig off

With your foot on the brake, select position P or N.

Start the engine.

If this procedure is not followed, there is an audible signal, accompanied by a message in the multifunction screen.

With the engine running, press the brake pedal.

Release the parking brake, unless it is programmed to automatic mode.

Select position R, D or M,

Gradually release the brake pedal. The vehicle moves off immediately.

If position N is engaged inadvertently while driving, allow the engine to return to idle then engage position D to accelerate.

When the engine is running at idle, with the brakes released, if position R, D or M is selective vehicle moves even without celerator being pressed.

When the engine is running, never leave children in the vehicle without supervision.

When carrying out maintenance with the engine running, apply the parking brake and select position P.

Automatic operation

Select position D for automatic changing of the six gears.

The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive mode, without any intervention on the part of the driver. It continuously selects the most suitable gear according to the style of driving, the profile of the road and the load in the vehicle.

For maximum acceleration without touching the lever, press the accelerator pedal down fully (kick down). The gearbox changes down automatically or maintains the gear selected until the maximum engine speed is reached.

On braking, the gearbox changes down automatically to provide efficient engine braking.

If you release the accelerator sharply, the gearbox will not change to a higher gear for safety reasons.

Never select position N while the vehicle is moving.

Never select positions P or R unless the vehicle is completely stationary.

Sport and snow prgrammes

These two special programmes supplement the automatic operation in very specific conditions of use.

Sport programme "S"

Press button "S", after starting the engine.

The gearbox automatically favours a dynamic style of driving.

S appears in the instrument panel.

Snow programme " \* "

Press button "⊗", after starting the engine.

The gearbox adapts to driving on slip-pery roads.

This programme improves starting and drive when traction is poor.

* appears in the instrument panel.

Return to automatic peration

At any time, press the button selected again to quit the programme engaged and return to auto-adaptive mode.

Manual operation

Select position M for sequential changing of the six gears.
Push the lever towards the + sign to change up a gear.
Pull the lever towards the - sign to change down a gear.

It is only possible to change from one gear to another if the vehicle speed and engine speed permit; otherwise, the gearbox will operate temporarily in automatic mode.

D disappears and the gears engaged appear in succession in the instrument panel.

If the engine speed is too low or too high, the gear selected fl ashes for a few seconds, then the actual gear engaged is displayed.

It is possible to change from position D (automatic) to position M (manual) at any time.

When the vehicle is stationary or moving very slowly, the gearbox selects gear M1 automatically.

The sport and snow programmes do not operate in manual mode.

Invalid value during manual operation

This symbol is displayed if a gear is not engaged correctly (selector between two positions).

Stoppig the vehicle

Before switching off the engine, you can engage position P or N to place the gearbox in neutral.

In both cases, apply the parking brake to immobilise the vehicle, unless it is programmed to automatic mode.

If the lever is not in position P, when the driver's door is opened or approximately 45 seconds after the ignition is switched off, there is an audible signal and a message appears.

Return the lever to position P; the audible signal stops and the message disappears.

Operating fault

When the ignition is on, the lighting of this warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen, indicates a gearbox malfunction.

In this case, the gearbox switches to back-up mode and is locked in 3rd gear. You may feel a substantial knock when changing from P to R and from N to R. This will not cause any damage to the gearbox.

Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h), local speed restrictions permitting.

Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

This warning lamp may also come on if a door is opened.

You risk damaging the gear-box:

• if you press the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time,
• if you force the lever from position P to another position when the battery is flat.

To reduce fuel consumption when stationary for long periods with the engine running (traffi c jam...), position the gear lever at N and apply the parking brake, unless it is programmed in automatic mode.

STOP & START

The Stop & Start system puts the engine temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during stops in the traffi c (red lights, traffi c jams, or other...). The engine restarts automatically - START mode - as soon as you want to move off. The restart takes place instantly, quickly and silently.

Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions as well as the noise level when stationary.

Operation

Going into engine STOP mode

The "ECO" warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and the engine goes into standby:

- with the electronic gearbox system, at speeds below 4 mph (6 km/h), press the brake pedal or put the gear lever in position N.

If your vehicle is fitted with the system, a time counter calculates the sum of the periods in STOP mode during a journey. It rests itself to zero every time the ignition is switched on with the key.

For your comfort, during parking maoeuvres, STOP mode is not available for a few sec-after coming out of reverse

STOP mode does not affect the functionality of the vehicle, such as for example, braking, power steering...

Never refuel with the engine in STOP mode; you must switch off the ignition with the key.

Special cases: STOP mode not available

STOP mode is not invoked when:

• the driver's door is open,
• the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
• the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph (10 km/h) since the last engine start using the key,
• the electric parking brake is applied or being applied,
• the engine is needed to maintain a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment,
• demisting is active,
• some special conditions (battery charge, engine temperature, braking assistance, ambient temperature...) where the engine is needed to assure control of a system.

In this case, the "ECO" warning lamp fl ashes for a few seconds then goes off.

This operation is perfectly normal.

Going into engine START mode

The "ECO" warning lamp goes off and the engine starts with the electronic gearbox system:

• gear lever in position A or M, release the brake pedal,
• or gear lever in position N and the brake pedal released, move the gear lever to position A or M,
• or engage reverse gear.

Special cases: START invoked automatically

START mode is invoked automatically when:

• the driver's door is open,
• the driver's seat belt is not fastened,
• the speed of the vehicle exceeds 7 mph (11 km/h) with the electronic gearbox system,
• the electric parking brake is being applied,
• some special conditions (battery charge, engine temperature, braking assistance, ambient temperature...) where the engine is needed for control of a system.

In this case the "ECO" warning lamp fl ashes for a few seconds, then goes off.

This operation is perfectly normal.

Deactivation

ECO OFF

At any time, press the "ECO OFF" switch to deactivate the system.

This is confirmed by the switch warning lamp coming on accompanied by a message in the screen.

If the system has been deactivated in STOP mode, the engine restarts immediately.

Reactivation

Press the "ECO OFF" switch again. The system is active again; this is confirmed by the switch warning lamp going off and a message in the screen.

The system is reactivated automatically at every new start using the key.

Operating fault

ECO OFF

In the event of a fault with the system, the "ECO OFF" switch warning lamp flashes then comes on continuously.

Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

In the event of a fault in STOP mode, the vehicle may stall. It is then necessary to switch off the ignition and start the engine again using the key.

Maintenance

Before doing anything under the bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid risk of injury resulting from auto-operation of START mode.

This system requires a 12 V battery with a special specification and technology (reference numbers available from PEUGEOT dealers).

Fitting a battery not listed by PEUGEOT introduces the risk of malfunction of the system.

To charge the battery, use a 12 V charger and observe the polarity.

ATTENTION BATTERIE SPECIFIQUE EN CAS DE REPLACEMENT DE REPERA OBLIGATORIEMENT ALU PETER A UTILISATION AV/VIRCUER NE PAS INVERES LES POLANTES DE LA BATTERIE, UTILISER UN CHARGAS 12V UNLIQUERMENT 12V 24V WARNING SPECIFIC BATTERY IN CASE OF REPLACEMENT REFER OBLIGATORIETY TO THE MACHUSET OF THE WHOLE DO NOT REVERSE BATTERY POLARITY, USB 12V CHARGER. ONLY

The Stop & Start system makes use of advanced technology. For any work on the go to a qualified workshop the skills and equipment re-, which a PEUGEOT dealer is to provide.

VISUAL AND AUDIBLE FRONT AND/OR REAR PARKING SENSORS

Two identical car interior diagrams showing yellow stick figures on the front and rear, with no text or symbols present.

System consisting of four proximity sensors, installed in the front and/or rear bumper.

It detects any obstacle (person, vehicle, tree, barrier...) located behind the vehicle, however, it will not be able to detect obstacles located immediately below the bumper.

11 Mar 2 23 521 4

The parking sensors are switched on :

• by engaging reverse gear,
• at a speed below 6 mph (10 km/h) in forward gear.

This is accompanied by an audible signal and display of the vehicle in the multifunction screen.

25t 3/10 18:52 100m 200m 90m 50m

The proximity information is indicated by:

• an audible signal which becomes more rapid as the vehicle approaches the obstacle,
• a graphic in the multifunction screen, with blocks which move closer to the vehicle.

The obstacle is located in relation to the emission of the audible signal by the speakers; front or rear and right or left.

When the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than approximately thirty centimetres, the audible signal becomes continuous and/or the "Danger" symbol appears, depending on the multifunction screen version.

An object, such as a stake, a roadworks cone or any other similar object may be detected

at the start of the manoeuvre but may no longer be detected when the vehicle moves nearer to it.

The parking sensors are switched off :

• when you exit reverse gear,
• when the speed is higher than 6 mph (10 km/h) in forward gear,
• when the vehicle has been stationary for more than three seconds in forward gear.

The parking sensor system cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need for vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver.

Deactivation

Diagram showing a black key labeled 'POT' with an orange button and letter 'A', alongside a technical schematic of mechanical components.

Press button A, the warning lamp comes on, the system is fully deactivated.

The system will be deactivated automatically when a trailer is being towed or when cicle carrier is fitted (vehicle fit-th a towbar or bicycle carrier mended by PEUGEOT).

Reactivation

Press button A again, the warning lamp switches off, the system is re-activated.

Operating fault

If an operating fault occurs, this warning lamp is displayed in the instrument panel and/or a message appears in the multifunction screen, ac-

companied by an audible signal (short beep), when reverse gear is engaged.

Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

In bad weather or in winter, ensure that the sensors are not covered with mud, ice or snow.

When reverse gear is engaged, an audible signal (long beep) indicates that the sensors may be dirty.

When the vehicle is being driven at a speed below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), certain sources of noise (motorcycles, lorries, pneumatic drills, ...) may trigger the parking sensor audible signals.

PARKING SPACE SENSORS

After measuring the parking space available between two vehicles or obstacles, this system gives you information on:

• the possibility of fitting into a free space, depending on the dimensions of your vehicle and the distances needed for manoeuvring,
• the level of difficulty of the manoeuvre to be performed.

Top-down diagram of a traffic collision scenario with two cars and an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

The system does not measure spaces which are clearly much smaller or larger than the size of the vehicle.

Displays in the instrument panel

The parking space sensor function warning lamp can have three different states:

• off: the function is not selected,
• on fixed: the function is selected but the conditions for measurement are not yet met (direction indicator not operating, speed too high) or the measurement phase has ended,
• flashing: measurement is in progress or the message is being displayed.

Diagram showing a device with a labeled button 'A' and a warning symbol, alongside a technical schematic of its components.

You can activate the "parking space sensor" function by pressing button A. The fixed illumination of the warning lamp indicates that the function is selected.

Operation

You have identified a parking space:

Press button A to activate the function.

Activate the direction indicator on the side where the space is to be measured.
During the measuring, go forward the length of the space, at a speed less than 12 mph (approximately 20 km/h), to prepare for your manoeuvre.

The system then measures the size of the space.

The system informs you of the level of diffi culty of the manoeuvre via a message in the multifunction screen accompanied by an audible signal.

The function displays the following types of message:

Parking possible

Parking possible OK

Parking difficult

Parking difficult

Parking not advised

Parking not advised

The function deactivates itself automatically:

• when you engage reverse gear,
• when you switch off the ignition,
• fi ve minutes after activation of the function or after the last measurement operation,
• if the vehicle speed exceeds the threshold of 45 mph (approximately 70 km/h) for one minute.

If the lateral distance between your vehicle and the parking space is too great, the system may not operate.

- The function remains available after each measurement and so can measure a number of places successively.

• In bad weather or in winter, ensure that the sensors are not covered by dirt, or by ice or snow.
• The parking space sensor function deactivates the front parking sensors during the space measuring phase when you are in forward gear.

If there is a malfunction, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

PEUGEOT & TOTAL

PARTNERS IN PERFORMANCE AND PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

Innovation at the service of performance The TOTAL Research and Development teams develop lubricants for PEUGEOT which satisfy the requirements of the latest technical innovations incorporated in PEUGEOT vehicles.

This ensures that you obtain the best performance and the maximum engine life.

Reduced exhaust emissions

TOTAL lubricants are formulated to optimise the efficiency of engines and the protection of the emissions post-treatment systems. It is crucial to observe the servicing recommendations made by PEUGEOT to ensure correct operation.

Side view of a car with red taillights and two racing cars visible through glass (no text or symbols)

PEUGEOT

TOTAL

OFFICIAL PARTNERS

PEUGEOT RECOMMENDS TOTAL

BONNET

Opening

Open the front left door.

Pull the interior bonnet release lever A, located at the bottom of the door aperture.

Push the exterior safety catch B to the left and raise the bonnet.

Unclip the stay C from its housing. Fix the stay in the notch to hold the bonnet open.

A

Diagram of a vehicle with motion arrow and label B, no readable text or symbols present

Diagram showing a car's side profile with a labeled component 'C' and a blue arrow indicating direction.

The location of the interior bonnet release lever prevents opening of the bonnet while the front left door is closed.

Do not open the bonnet in high winds.

When the engine is hot, handle the exterior safety catch and the bonnet stay with care (risk of burns).

Before doing anything under the bonnet, switch off the Stop & Start system to avoid risk of injury resulting from an aquatic change to START mode.

Closing

Take the stay out of the support notch.
Clip the stay in its housing.
Lower the bonnet and release it at the end of its travel.
Pull on the bonnet to check that it is secured correctly.

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL (DIESEL)

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly steps with blue arrows indicating direction of movement or force

On vehicle fitted with HDi engines, the fuel system must be primed if you run out of fuel; refer to the engine compartment view on the "Diesel engine" page. If the tank on your vehicle is fitted with a misfuel prevention device, refer to the section "Access - § Misfuel prevention (Diesel)".

1.6 litre Turbo HDI engine

Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of diesel.
Open the bonnet.
If necessary, unclip the styling cover for access to the priming pump.
Squeeze and release the priming pump repeatedly until resistance is felt (there may be resistance at the first press).
Operate the starter until the engine starts (if the engine does not start at the first attempt, wait around 15 seconds before trying again).
If the engine does not start after a few attempts, operate the priming pump again then start the engine.
Clip the styling cover back in place.
Close the bonnet.

2 litre Turbo HDI engine

Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of Diesel.
Open the bonnet.
Unclip the style cover for access to the priming pump.
Slacken the bleed screw.
Squeeze and release the priming pump repeatedly until fuel appears in the transparent pipe with the green connector.
Retighten the bleed screw.
Operate the starter until the engine starts.
Put the style cover back in position and clip it in place.
Close the bonnet.

If the engine does not start first time, don't keep trying. Start the procedure again from the beginning.

Diagram of a car engine bay with numbered components for identification

PETROL ENGINES

The various caps and covers allow access for checking the levels of the various fluids and for replacing certain components.

1. Power steering reservoir.
2. Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.

3. Coolant reservoir.

4. Brake fluid reservoir.

5. Battery/Fuses.

6. Fusebox.

7. Air filter.

8. Engine oil dipstick.
9. Engine oil filler cap.

Diagram of a car engine compartment with numbered parts, likely for assembly or maintenance instructions.

DIESEL ENGINES

The various caps and covers allow access for checking the levels of the various fluids, for replacing certain components and for priming the fuel system.

1. Power steering reservoir.

2. Brake fluid reservoir.

3. Engine oil dipstick.

4. Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.

5. Battery/Fuses.

6. Engine oil filler cap.

7. Coolant reservoir.

8. Fusebox.

9. Priming pump*.

10. Air filter.

11. Bleed screw*.

* According to engine.

CHECKING LEVELS

Check all of these levels regularly and top them up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated.

If a level drops significantly, have the corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

When working under the bon-net, take care, as certain areas of the engine may be extremely hot (risk of burns).

Oil level

The check is carried out either when the ignition is switched on using the oil level indicator on the instrument panel, or using the dipstick.

This manual check will only be correct if the vehicle is on level ground and the engine has been off for more than 30 minutes.

After topping up the oil, the check when switching on the ignition with the oil level indicator in the instrument panel will only be valid 30 minutes after topping up.

It is normal to top up the oil level between services. PEUGEOT recommends that you check the level and top up if necessary every miles (5 000 kilometres).

Engine oil change

Refer to the servicing booklet for details of the interval for this operation.

In order to maintain the reliability of the engine and emission control system, the use of additives in the engine oil is prohibited.

Oil specifi cation

The oil must be the correct grade for your engine and conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.

Brake fluid level

The brake fluid level should be close to the "MAX" mark. If it is not, check the brake pad wear.

Changing the fluid

Refer to the servicing booklet for details of the interval for this operation.

Fluid specifi cation

The brake fluid must conform to the manufacturer's recommendations and meet the DOT4 standard.

Power steering fluid level

The power steering fluid level should be close to the "MAX" mark. Unscrew the cap, with the engine cold, to check the level.

Coolant level

The coolant level should be close to the "MAX" mark but should never exceed it.

When the engine is warm, the temperature of the coolant is regulated by the fan. This can operate with the ignition off.

On vehicles which are fitted with a particle emission fi iter, the fan may operate after the vehicle has been switched off, even if the engine is cold.

In addition, as the cooling system is pressurised, wait at least one hour after switching off the engine before carrying out any work.

To avoid any risk of scalding, unscrew the cap by two turns to allow the pressure to drop. When the pressure has dropped, remove the cap and top up the level.

Changing the coolant

The coolant does not have to be changed.

Fluid specifi cation

The coolant must conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.

Screenwash and headlamp wash fluid

In the case of vehicles fitted with headlamp washers, the low fluid level is indicated by an audible signal and a message in the instrument panel screen.

Top up the reservoir when you stop the vehicle.

Fluid specifi cation

For optimum cleaning and to avoid freezing, this fluid must not be topped up with or replaced with plain water.

Diesel additive level (Diesel engine with particle emission filter)

The additive reservoir low level is indicated by fi xed illumination of this warning lamp, accompanied by an audible warning and a message in the multifunction screen.

Topping up

This additive must be topped up by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.

Used products

Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or fluids with the skin.

Most of these fluids are harmful to health or indeed very corrosive.

Do not discard used oil or fluids into sewers or onto the ground.

Take used oil to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop (France) or to an authorised waste disposal site.

CHECKS

Unless otherwise indicated, check these components in accordance with the servicing booklet and according to your engine.

Otherwise, have them checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified work-

Battery

The battery does not require any maintenance.

However, check that the terminals are clean and correctly tightened, particularly in summer and winter.

When carrying out work on the battery, refer to the "Practical information" section for details of the precautions to be taken before disconnecting the battery and following its reconnection.

ATTENTION BATTERIE SPECIFIQUE IN CAS DE REPLACEMENT DE REPERAR OBLIGATIONMENT AU PENAUL D'UTILIZATION IN WHOLECAPS HE DES INVERES LES POLEURS DE LA FERTIERE, UTILISER UN CHARGOUR 12V UNQUISIEMENT 12v 24v WARNING SPECIFIC BATTERY IN CASE OF REPLACEMENT REPER OBLIGATION TO: THE HANDICOR OF ON WHOLECAPS DO NOT REVEELED BATTERY LAUTY, USE 15V CHARGER ONLY

The presence of this label, in particular with the Stop & Start system, indicates the use of a specific 12 V lead-acid battery with special technology and cation, for which the involve-of a PEUGEOT dealer or a red workshop is required when ing or disconnecting the bat-

Failure to observe this recommendation may shorten the life of the battery.

Air filter

Refer to the servicing booklet for details of the replacement intervals for these components.

Depending on the environment (e.g. dusty atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle (e.g. city driving), replace them twice as often if necessary (refer to the "Engines" paragraph).

Oil filter

Replace the oil filter each time the engine oil is changed.

Refer to the servicing booklet for details of the replacement interval for this component.

Dust filter/Anti-odour filter (activated carbon)

Your vehicle is fitted with a filter which traps certain dust and limits odours in the ventilation and air conditioning.

Refer to the Warranty and Maintenance Record for its replacement interval.

Do not hesitate to change it if you notice unpleasant odours, contact a PEUGEOT dealer.

A clogged passenger compartment filter may reduce the performance of the air conditioning system and produce unpleasant odours.

Particle emission filter (Diesel)

Maintenance of the particle emission filter must be carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

On a new vehicle, the first few particle emissions fi Iter regenera-tions may be accompanied by a

"burning" smell, which is perfectly normal. Following prolonged operation of the vehicle at very low speed or at idle, you may, in exceptional circumstances, notice water vapour from the exhaust on acceleration. This does not affect the performance of the vehicle or the environment.

Manual gearbox

The gearbox does not require any maintenance (no oil change).

Refer to the servicing booklet for the details of the level checking interval for this component.

6-speed electronic gearbox system

The gearbox does not require any maintenance (no oil change).

Refer to the servicing booklet for details of the checking interval for this component.

Automatic gearbox

The gearbox does not require any maintenance (no oil change).

Refer to the servicing booklet for details of the level checking interval for this component.

Brake pads

Brake wear depends on the style of driving, particularly in the case of vehicles used in town, over short distances. It may be necessary to have the

condition of the brakes checked, even between vehicle services.

Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the brake fluid level indicates that the brake pads are worn.

Brake disc wear

For information on checking brake disc wear, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Electric parking brake

This system does not require any routine servicing. However, in the event of a problem, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

For more information, see "Driving - Electric parking brake - § Operating faults".

TEMPORARY PUNCTURE REPAIR KIT (5 SEAT VERSION)\*

Complete system consisting of a compressor and a sealant cartridge which permits temporary repair of a tyre so that you can drive to the nearest garage.

It is designed to repair most punctures which could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread or shoulder.

Access to the kit

Diagram of a car interior showing structural components and directional arrows (no text or labels)

The kit is located in the boot under the concertina board.

Tools 4 and 5 are located in the boot interior trim, on the left-hand side.

List of tools Other accessories

Diagram showing three labeled components: a yellow handheld device, two black rectangular blocks with handwritten letters, and a screw, all marked with numbered labels.

All of these tools are specific to your vehicle. Do not use them for other purposes.

1. 12 V compressor.

Contains a sealant cartridge for the temporary repair of a tyre and can be used to adjust the tyre pressures.

1. Two chocks to chock the vehicle.

2. Socket for security bolts (located in the glove box*) .

For adapting the wheelbrace to the special security bolts.

Illustration of a gold tool with a loop handle and two numbered callouts (4 and 5) against a gray background, no text or symbols present.

1. Removable towing eye.

Refer to the paragraph "Towing the vehicle".

1. Electric parking brake emergency release control.

Refer to "Electric parking brake" in the "Driving" section.

* Depending on destination country.

Description of the kit

A B C E D

A. "Sealant" or "Air" position selector.

B. On "I"/off "O" switch.

C. Deflation button.

D. Pressure gauge (in bar or p.s.i.).
E. Compartment housing:

-a cable with adaptor for 12 V socket,

- various inflation adaptors for accessories, such as balls, bicycle tyres...

箱-50 I H G F

F. Sealant cartridge.
G. White pipe with cap for repair.

H. Black pipe for inflation.

I. Speed limit sticker.

The speed limit sticker I must be affi xed to the vehicle's steering wheel to remind you wheel is in temporary use.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving with a tyre repaired using this type of kit.

Repair procedure

1. Sealing

Illustration of a yellow handheld device with labeled buttons and icons, showing internal UI elements and labels A and B.

Switch off the ignition.

Turn the selector A to the "sealant" position.

Check that the switch B is in position "O".

Illustration of a car tire connected to a yellow handheld battery and cable, with two sensors attached (no text or symbols visible)

Uncoil the white pipe G fully.

Unscrew the cap from the white pipe.

Connect the white pipe to the valve of the tyre to be repaired.

Diagram showing a device with labeled components and two inset images illustrating electrical connections or wiring.

Connect the compressor's electric plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.

Start the vehicle and leave the engine running.

Avoid removing any foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre.

Take care, this product is harmful (e.g. ethylene-glycol, colophony...) if swallowed and causes irritation to the eyes.

Keep it out of reach of children.

Illustration of a yellow handheld device with a tool inserted, showing internal components and wiring (no text or symbols)

Switch on the compressor by moving the switch B to position "I" until the tyre pressure reaches 2.0 bars. The sealant is injected into the tyre under pressure; do not disconnect the pipe from the valve during this operation (risk of splashing).

Do not start the compressor before connecting the white pipe to the tyre valve: the at product would be expelled in the pipe.

If after around 5 to 7 minutes the pressure is not attained, this indicates that the tyre is pairable; contact a PEUGEOT or a qualified workshop for asce.

20 - 60 km/h 15 - 35 mph 0 5 km 3 miles

Remove the kit and screw the cap back on the white pipe.
Take care to avoid staining your vehicle with traces of fluid. Keep the kit to hand.
Drive immediately for approximately three miles (fi ve kilometres), at reduced speed (between 15 and 35 mph [20 and 60 km/h]), to plug the puncture.
Stop to check the repair and the tyre pressure using the kit.

Tyre under-inflation detection

If the vehicle is fitted with tyre under-inflation detection, the under-inflation warning lamp will remain on after the wheel has been repaired until the system is reinitialised by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

2. INFLATION

Diagram showing car tire testing setup with labeled components A and H, and a car component being connected via wires.

Turn the selector A to the "air" position.

Uncoil the black pipe H fully.

Connect the black pipe to the valve of the wheel.

Illustration of a handheld electrical testing device with two views showing internal components (no text or symbols)

F Connect the compressor's electric plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
Start the vehicle again and leave the engine running.
Adjust the pressure using the compressor (to inflate: switch B in position "I"; to deflate: switch B in position "O" and press button C), in accordance with the vehicle's tyre pressure label (located on the left hand door aperture).

Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.

You must inform the technician that you have used this kit. After inspection, the technician will inform you whether the tyre can be repaired or must be replaced.

Illustration of a yellow electronic device with labeled parts and a magnified view showing labeled components B and C.

A loss of pressure indicates that the puncture has not been fully plugged; contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified workshop for assistance.

Remove and stow the kit.
Drive at reduced speed (50 mph [80 km/h] max) limiting the distance travelled to approximately 120 miles (200 km).

Removing the cartridge

Close-up of a yellow electronic device with a purple arrow indicating a cable or connector (no text or symbols visible)

Stow the black pipe.
- Detach the angled base from the white pipe.
Support the compressor vertically.
Unscrew the cartridge from the bottom.

Beware of discharges of fluid. The expiry date of the fluid is indicated on the cartridge.

The sealant cartridge is designed for single use; even if only partly used, it must be replaced.

After use, do not discard the cartridge into the environment, take it to an authorised waste disposal site or a PEUGEOT dealer.

Do not forget to obtain a new sealant cartridge, available from PEUGEOT dealers or from a qualified workshop.

Checking tyre pressures/inflating accessories

You can also use the compressor, without injecting any product, to:

• check or adjust the pressure of your tyres,
• inflate other accessories (balls, bicycle tyres...).

Diagram showing a car tire testing setup with labeled components A and H, and a clamp device inserted into the charger.

Turn the selector A to the "Air" position.
- Uncoil the black pipe H fully.
Connect the black pipe to the valve of the wheel or accessory. If necessary, fi t one of the adaptors supplied with the kit fi rst.

Diagram illustrating a device operation with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating process steps

Connect the compressor's electrical connector to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
Start the vehicle and let the engine run.
Adjust the pressure using the compressor (to inflate: switch B in position "I"; to deflate: switch B in position "O" and press button C), according to the vehicle's tyre pressure label or the accessory's pressure label.
Remove the kit then stow it.

TEMPORARY PUNCTURE REPAIR KIT (7 SEAT VERSION)\*

Complete system consisting of a compressor and a bottle of sealant which permits temporary repair of the tyre so that you can drive to the nearest garage.

Diagram of a vehicle interior with a purple arrow pointing to a highlighted rectangular area (no text or symbols present)

The kit is located in the boot, under the left hand seat in the 3 rd row.

This kit is available from a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

It is designed to repair holes of a maximum diameter of 6 mm, only where located on the tyre tread or shoulder. Avoid removing any foreign bodies which have penetrated the tyre.

Using the kit

Switch off the ignition.
Tick the wheel to be repaired on the speed limitation sticker enclosed then affi x the sticker to the vehicle's steering wheel to remind you that a wheel is in temporary use.
Clip the bottle 1 on the compressor 2.

Check that the switch A is tilted to position "0".
Connect the pipe of the bottle 1 to the valve of the tyre to be repaired.
Unwind the pipe of the compressor 2 fully, then connect it to the bottle.

Connect the compressor's electric plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
Start the vehicle and leave the engine running.

* According to country of sale.

Diagram of a medical or laboratory device with labeled parts, including a pressure monitor and tubing.

Diagram showing car tire installation with labeled components and a magnified inset showing a cable labeled 'A'

Diagram showing a car interior with a plug and cable, annotated with purple arrows indicating direction of movement or change.

Switch on the compressor by tilting the switch A to position "1" until the tyre pressure reaches 2.0 bars.

Close-up of a small electronic device with a grid, indicator lights, and a labeled component (A), no readable text or symbols present.

If this pressure has not been reached after approximately fi ve to ten minutes, the tyre cannot be repaired; contact a PEUGEOT or a qualified workshop to have your vehicle repaired.

Remove the compressor and store the bottle in the plastic bag, supplied in the kit, to avoid staining your vehicle with traces of fluid.

Drive immediately for approximately two miles (three kilometres), at reduced speed (between 10 and 35 mph [20 and 60 km/h]), to plug the puncture.

Stop to check the repair and the pressure.

Connect the compressor pipe directly to the valve of the repaired wheel.

20 - 60 km/h 15 - 35 mph 0 5 km 3 miles

Illustration of a car tire being connected to a pressure testing device (no text or symbols visible)

Connect the compressor's electric plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket again.
Start the vehicle again and leave the engine running.

Diagram showing a car interior with a cable and directional arrows indicating movement or change, alongside an inset image of a device.

Adjust the pressure using the compressor (to inflate: switch A in position "1"; to deflate: switch A in position "0" and press button B), in accordance with the vehicle's tyre pressure label (located on the door aperture on the driver's side), then remember to check that the leak is plugged correctly (no further loss of pressure after several miles [kilometres]).

Remove the compressor, then store the whole kit.
Drive at reduced speed (50 mph [80 km/h] max) for no more than approximately 125 miles (200 km).
Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible to have the tyre repaired or replaced by a technician.

e B A

Take care, the bottle of fluid contains ethylene-glycol. This product is harmful if swallowed and causes irritation to the eyes. Keep it out of reach of children.
The expiry date of the fluid is indicated on the base of the bottle.
The bottle is designed for a single use; even if only partly used, it must be replaced.
After use, do not discard the bottle into the environment, take it to a PEUGEOT dealer or an authorised waste disposal site.
Do not forget to obtain a new bottle of sealant product, available from a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
If the vehicle is fitted with tyre under-inflation detection, the tyre under-inflation warning lamp will remain on after the wheel has been repaired until the system is reinitialised by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
If the vehicle is fitted with tyre under-inflation detection, the tyre under-inflation warning lamp will remain on after the wheel has been repaired until the system is reinitialised by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

CHANGING A WHEEL \*

Procedure for changing a faulty wheel for the spare wheel using the tools provided with the vehicle.

Access to the tools

Three-panel technical diagram showing mechanical components with purple arrows indicating downward motion (no text or symbols)

The tools 2 to 4 are installed in a box, in the middle of the spare wheel, placed underneath the vehicle.

The tools 1 and 6 to 9 are installed under the concertina boards, in the boot inner trim.

To gain access to them:

open the boot,
raise the concertina boards.

List of tools*

Exploded view diagram of a mechanical device with numbered parts for identification

All of these tools are specific to your vehicle. Do not use them for other purposes.

* Depending on destination country.

1. Wheelbrace.
   For removing the wheel trim and the wheel fixing bolts.
2. Jack with integral handle.
   For raising the vehicle.
3. "Bolt cover" tool (according to equipment).
   For removing the bolt protectors (covers) on alloy wheels.
4. Centring guide.
   For refi tting an alloy wheel to the hub.
5. Socket for the security bolts (located in the glove box).
   For adapting the wheelbrace to the special security bolts.
6. Two chocks to immobilise the vehicle.
7. Wheelbrace extension.
   For unscrewing/tightening the spare wheel carrier drive.

Other accessories

Medical implant tool with labeled parts (8, 9) and a zigzag line on the right (no text or symbols beyond labels)

1. Removable towing eye.

Refer to the paragraph "Towing the vehicle".

1. Electric parking brake emergency release control.

Refer to "Electric parking brake" in the "Driving" section.

Wheel with trim

When removing the wheel, detach the trim first using the

wheelbrace 1 pulling at the valve passage hole.

When refitting the wheel, refit the trim starting by placing its notch facing the valve and press around its edge with the palm of your hand.

Access to the spare wheel making out the wheel

Line drawing of a car with a tire and a red hose, no text or symbols present

The spare wheel is supported by a cable-driven carrier underneath the vehicle.

Raise the concertina board to reveal the spare wheel carrier drive nut.
Turn this drive nut fully clockwise, using the wheelbrace 1 and the extension 7, to unwind the carrier cable.

Detach the wheel/box assembly from the rear of the vehicle.
Remove the hook with its connection plate to release the wheel/box assembly, as shown in the illustration.

Pull out the wheel to gain access to the box.
^F Slide the box cover to the centre and remove it to gain access to the other tools.
Pull out the wheel to gain access to the box.
^F Slide the box cover to the centre and remove it to gain access to the other tools.

Pure mechanical component diagram without any text, numbers, or symbols

Diagram showing a mechanical or electrical component with numbered annotations and an arrow indicating direction

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a wheel and mechanical component with a purple arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Diagram showing mechanical assembly steps labeled b and c with directional arrows indicating motion or movement

3D rendered mechanical assembly showing internal components and a housing (no text or symbols visible)

* Depending on destination country.

Line drawing of a car with a tire and a red tire, no text or symbols present

Putting the wheel back in place

Store the tools used in the box and close the cover.
Position the box on the ground and centre the spare wheel on it.
Pass the hook with its connection plate into the wheel then the box, as illustrated.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a purple arrow and label 'a' (no readable text or symbols)

Close-up of a car wheel and brake disc with a purple arrow pointing to the wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Close-up of a mechanical component with a pointer and a purple arrow, no visible text or symbols

Tyre under-inflation detection

The spare wheel is not fitted with a sensor. The punctured wheel must be repaired by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Raise the wheel/box assembly underneath the vehicle by turning the carrier drive nut anticlockwise using the wheelbrace 1 and the extension 7.
Tighten fully and check that the wheel is horizontally flush against the floor.

Diagram showing a mechanical or electrical component with numbered annotations and directional arrow, likely indicating a step or direction.

Removing a wheel

Diagram of a car with labeled parts A, B, and numbered annotations pointing to the front wheel.

Parking the vehicle

Immobilise the vehicle where it does not block traffic: the ground must be level, stable and non-slippery ground.

Apply the parking brake unless it has been programmed to automatic mode, switch off the ignition and engage first gear * to lock the wheels.

Check that the braking warning lamp and the P warning lamp on the parking brake control come on.

If necessary, place a chock under the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be changed.

The occupants must get out of the vehicle and wait where they are safe.

Never go underneath a vehicle raised using a jack; use an axle stand.

* position R for the electronic gear control gearbox; P for the automatic gearbox.

List of operations

Remove the bolt cover from each of the bolts using the tool 3 (according to equipment).
Fit the security socket 5 on the wheelbrace 1 to slacken the security bolt (if your vehicle has them).
Slacken the other bolts using the wheelbrace 1 only.

Place the jack 2 in contact with one of the two front A or rear B locations provided on the underbody, whichever is closest to the wheel to be changed.
Extend the jack 2 until its base plate is in contact with the ground. Ensure that the centreline of the jack base plate is directly below the location A or B used.

Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient space between the wheel and the ground to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel easily.
Remove the bolts and store them in a clean place.
Remove the wheel.

Diagram of car tire assembly with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating motion or repair steps

A A 2

Diagram of a car tire with attached chain and bracket components, showing alignment arrows (no text or symbols)

Fitting a wheel

Line drawing of a car with a person inside the driver's seat and a plug inserted into the window (no text or symbols)

Fitting the "space-saver" spare wheel

If your vehicle is fi tted with alloy wheels, when tightening the bolts on fi tting it is normal to notice that the washers do not come into contact with the "space-saver" spare wheel. The wheel is secured by the conical contact of each bolt.

After changing a wheel

To store the punctured wheel in the boot correctly, first remove the central cover.

When using the "space-saver" type spare wheel, do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

Have the tightening of the bolts and the pressure of the spare wheel checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.

Have the punctured wheel repaired and replace it on the vehicle as soon as possible.

List of operations

Put the wheel in place on the hub using the centring guide 4.
Screw in the bolts by hand to the stop.
Using the wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security socket 5, pre-tighten the security bolt (if your vehicle has them).
Pre-tighten the other bolts using the wheelbrace 1 only.
Lower the vehicle fully.
Fold the jack 2 and detach it.

Using the wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security socket 5, tighten the security bolt (if your vehicle has them).
Tighten the other bolts using the wheelbrace 1 only.
Refit the bolt covers to each of the bolts (according to equipment).
Store the tools in the box.

Diagram illustrating car tire repair steps with numbered instructions and mechanical components

Diagram of a car wheel assembly with a clamping tool and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Diagram of a car tire assembly with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating motion or movement.

CHANGING A BULB

Front lamps

Model with halogen headlamps

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components, likely for vehicle design or labeling.

1. Direction indicators (HP24 amber-24W).
2. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W).
3. Main beam headlamps (H7-55W).
4. Daytime running lamps (HP24-24W).
5. Foglamps (PS24-24W).
6. Sidelamps (W5-5W).

headlamps

Diagram of a car interior with numbered parts labeled 1, 2, 3, and 4 pointing to different compartments or parts.

1. Direction indicators (HP24 amber-24W).
2. Dipped/main beam directional headlamps (D1S-35W).
3. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps (P21/5W).
4. Foglamps (PS24-24W).

Risk of electrocution

Xenon bulbs (D1S-35W) must be replaced by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Model with xenon and directional

The headlamps are fitted with polycarbonate glass with a protective coating:

do not clean them using a dry or abrasive cloth, nor with a detergent or solvent product,

use a sponge and soapy water,

when using a high pressure washer on persistent marks, do not keep the lance directed towards the lamps or their edges for too long, so as not to damage their protective coating and seals.

Do not touch the bulb directly with your fingers, use lint-free cloths.

Changing a bulb should only be done after the headlamp has been switched off for a few minutes (risk of serious burns).

It is imperative to use only anti-ultraviolet (UV) type bulbs in order not to damage the headlamp.

Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb with the same type and specification.

Changing direction indicator and daytime running lamp bulbs (models with halogen headlamps)

Close-up of a car headlight with visible internal components and a purple arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols)

Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Changing dipped beam headlamp bulbs (models with halogen headlamps)

graph TD
    A["Top Gear Component"] --> B{Rotation Point}
    B --> C["Left Side Gear"]
    B --> D["Right Side Gear"]

Remove the protective plastic cover by pulling on the tab.
Disconnect the bulb connector.
Extract the bulb by pulling and change it.

To refit, carry out these operations in reverse order.

s Changing main beam headlamp and sidelamp bulbs

graph TD
    A["Engine Component"] --> B{Mechanical Assembly}
    B --> C["Actuator"]
    C --> D["Drive"]
    D --> E["Control Unit"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333

Remove the protective plastic cover by pulling on the tab.
Disconnect the bulb connector.
Remove the bulb by pulling and change it.

To refit, carry out these operations in reverse order.

Changing dipped beam and main beam headlamp bulbs (models with xenon headlamps)

D1S xenon bulbs must be changed by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as there is a risk of electrocution.

It is recommended that the D1S bulbs are changed at the same time when one of them fails.

Changing integrated direction indicator side repeaters

3D model of a car side mirror with a purple downward arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols)

Close-up of a car front mirror with a purple arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols)

Changing foglamp bulbs

Diagram of a car interior showing a circular component with a purple arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols present)

Changing sidelamp and daytime running lamp bulbs (models with xenon headlamps)

Remove the protective plastic cover by pulling on the tab.

Disconnect the bulb connector.
Remove the bulb by pulling and change it.

To refit, carry out these operations in reverse order.

Insert a screwdriver towards the Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali-centre of the repeater between the fi ed workshop. repeater and the base of the mirror.
Tilt the screwdriver to extract the repeater and remove it.
Disconnect the repeater connector.

To refit, carry out these operations in reverse order.

Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to obtain replacement repeaters.

Changing direction indicator bulbs

Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

You can also contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have these bulbs changed.

Rear lamps

Diagram showing five labeled anatomical or structural features with numbered annotations, likely from a scientific or medical illustration.

1. Direction indicators (PY21W-21W).
2. Brake lamps (P21W-21W).
3. Sidelamps (LEDs).
4. Reversing lamp (P21W).
5. Foglamp (P21W).

Changing brake lamp and direction indicator bulbs

Remove the two lamp unit fixing nuts.
Pull the lamp rearwards (a positioning lug retains the lamp).
Disconnect the lamp connector.

Press the four tabs and remove the bulb holder.

Turn the bulb a quarter of a turn and change it.

To refit, carry out these operations in reverse order.

Two views of a red vehicle headlight component, one showing side and front angles with purple arrows indicating features (no text or symbols present)

3D rendered mechanical component with purple arrows indicating force or movement (no text or symbols)

Diagram of a mechanical device with two circular components and purple arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Changing sidelamps (LEDs)

Illustration of a curved, segmented object with red horizontal lines, resembling a stylized food or material (no text or symbols)

For the replacement of this type of LED lamp, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Changing the third brake lamp changing the number plate lamp bulbs (W5-5W)

Image showing a red arrow pointing upward on a gray background with faint horizontal lines.

Open the boot and remove the upper seal.
Unscrew the two nuts.
Press the threaded pins while supporting the lamp from the outside.
Disconnect the connector and remove the screenwash pipe.

Diagram of a car interior with two purple directional arrows pointing up (no text or symbols)

Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the outer holes of the lens.
Push it outwards to unclip.
Remove the lens.
Pull the bulb out and change it.

Changing foglamp or reversing lamp bulbs

Abstract graphic with a red rectangular shape and a purple curved arrow on gray background (no text or symbols)

Reach under the bumper.
Turn the bulb a quarter of a turn and change it.

A B C

Press the pairs of clips A then B then C to detach and gain access to the bulb holder.
Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the outer holes of the lens.
Push it outwards to unclip.
Remove the lens.
Pull the bulb out and change it.

CHANGING A FUSE

Procedure for replacing a failed fuse with a new fuse to rectify a failure of the corresponding function.

Diagram showing a vehicle interior with a red gear-like object and a purple arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols present)

Access to the tools

The fuse extraction tweezer is fitted to the back of the dashboard fusebox cover.

To gain access to it:

remove the cover completely,

remove the tweezer.

Changing a fuse

Before changing a fuse, the cause of the failure must be identified and rectified.

Identify the failed fuse by checking the condition of its filament.

Good

Failed

Use the special tweezer to extract the fuse from its housing.
Always replace the failed fuse with a fuse of the same rating.
Check that the number marked on the fusebox, the rating marked on the fuse and the following tables all agree.

Installing electrical accessories

Your vehicle's electrical system is designed to operate with standard or optional equipment.

Before installing other electrical equipment or accessories on your vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

PEUGEOT will not accept responsibility for the cost incurred in repairing your vehicle or for using malfunctions resulting from the

installation of accessories not supplied and not recommended by PEUGEOT and not installed in accordance with its instructions, in particular when the combined consumption of all of the additional equipment connected exceeds 10 milliamperes.

Dashboard fuses

The fusebox is placed in the lower dashboard (left-hand side).

Interior view of a car with visible seats and dashboard lines, featuring a purple arrow pointing to a small photo (no text or symbols)

F11 F2 F9 F6 F5 F1 F7 F4 F3 F10 F8 F13 F12 F14 F15 SH F17

Fuse tables

F use N°	Ratin g (A)	Functions
F1		15 Rear wiper.
F2		- Not used.
F3		5 Airbag control unit.
F4		Electrochromatic rear view mirror, air conditioning, switching and protection unit, rear multimedia.
F5	30	Front one-touch electric windows.
F6	30	Rear one-touch electric windows.
F7		Front and rear courtesy lamps, map reading lamps, rear reading lamps, sun visor lighting, glove box lighting, centre armrest lighting, boot 12 V relay control.

Interior view of a car with visible seats and dashboard lines, featuring a purple arrow pointing to a small photo (no text or symbols)

F11 F2 F9 F6 F5 F1 F7 F4 F3 F10 F8 F13 F12 F14 F15 SH F17

Access to the fuses

^8 refer to the paragraph "Access to the tools".

F11 F2 F9 F6 F5 F1 F7 F4 F3 F10 F8 F13 F12 F14 F15 SH F17

Fuse N°	Rating (A)	Functions
F8	20	Audio system, audio/telephone, CD changer, multifunction screen, tyre under-inflation detection, alarm siren, alarm control unit, telematic unit, service module (with Peugeot Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D)).
F9	30	Front 12 V socket, cigarette lighter, rear 12 V socket.
F10	15	Steering mounted controls.
F11	15	Low current ignition switch.
F12	15	Trailer presence, rain/brightness sensor, supply for fuses F32, F34, F35.
F13	5	Engine fusebox, airbag control unit.
F14	15	Instrument panel, instrument panel screen, supply for fuse F33.
F15	30	Locking and deadlocking.
F17	40	Rear screen demist/defrost, supply for fuse F30.
SH	-	PARC shunt.

Fuse N°	Rating (A)	Functions
F29	-	Not used
F30	5	Heated door mirrors.
F31	30	Boot 12 V socket.
F32	5	Electronic gear control gearbox gear lever.
F33	10	Head-up display, Bluetooth system, air conditioning.
F34	5	Seat belt warning lamps display.
F35	10	Parking sensors, Hi-Fi amplifier authorisation.
F36	10	Trailer fusebox control unit, driver's door control pad.
F37	20	Hi-Fi amplifier.
F38	30	Driver's electric seat.
F39	20	Panoramic sunroof blind.
F40	-	Not used.

Engine compartment fuses

The fusebox is placed in the engine compartment near the battery (left-hand side).

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with internal structure (no visible text or symbols)

Access to the fuses

Unclip the cover.

Change the fuse (see corresponding paragraph).

When you have finished, close the cover carefully to ensure correct sealing of the fusebox.

F10 F20 F19 F18 F17 F16 F15 F14 F13 F12 F11 F10 F9 F8 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F21 F13

Fuse table

Fuse N°	Rating (A)	Functions
F1	20	Engine management unit supply, injection pump and EGR electrovalves (2 litre HDI), injectors (2 litre HDI).
F2	15	Horn.
F3	10	Front/rear screenwash.
F4	10	Daytime running lamps.
F5	15	Canister purge electrovalves, turbine discharge and Turbo pressure regulation electrovalves (1.6 I THP 16V), oil vapour heater (1.6 I THP 16V), diesel heater (1.6 I HDI 16V).
F6	10	Diagnostic socket, directional headlamps, particle emission fi Iter pump (Diesel), Distance alert, engine coolant level detector, mirror adjustment control.
F7	10	Power steering control unit, automatic gearbox, directional headlamps height adjustment motor.
F8	20	Starter motor control.
F9	10	Clutch and brake pedal switches.
F10	30	Engine management unit actuators (petrol: ignition coils, electrovalves, oxygen sensors, injectors, heaters, fuel pump, electronic thermostat) (Diesel: electrovalves, heaters).
F11	40	Air conditioning blower.

F10 F20 F19 F18 F17 F16 F15 F14 F13 F12 F11 F9 F8 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F21 F14

Fuse N°	Rating (A)	Functions
F12	30	Windscreen wipers slow/fast speed.
F13	40	Built-in systems interface supply (ignition positive).
F14		30 Air pump.
F15	10	Right-hand main beam headlamp.
F16	10	Left-hand main beam headlamp.
F17	15	Left-hand dipped headlamp.
F18	15	Right-hand dipped headlamp.
F19		Oil vapour heater (1.6 litre VTi), Turbo pressure regulation inside electrovalve (Diesel), engine coolant level detector (Diesel).
F20		Electronic thermostat, variable timing electrovalves, Turbo pressure regulation electrovalve (Diesel), engine coolant level detector (Diesel).
F21		Fan assembly relay supply, Valvetronic relay control (51.6 litre VTi), Turbo cooling (1.6 litre THP), air flow sensor (1.6 litre HDI).

F6 F4 F2 F5 F3 F1 F7 F11 F9 F8 F12 F10

* The maxi-fuses and certain other fuses provide additional protection for the electrical systems. All work on the these fuses must be carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Table of mini and midi-fuses above the battery

Fuse N°	Rating (A)	Functions
F1	-	Not used.
F2	5	Dual function brake switch.
F3	5	Battery charge unit.
F4	25	ABS/ESP electrovalves.
F5	5	ABS/ESP control unit.
F6	15	Automatic gearbox, electronic gear control gearbox.
F7*	80	Power steering electropump assembly.
F8*	60	Fan assembly.
F9*	80/30	Pre-heat unit (Diesel), Valvetronic electric motor (1.6 litre THP).
F10*	40	ABS/ESP electropump assembly.
F11*	100	Switching and protection unit.
F12*	30	Electronic gear control gearbox electropump assembly.

Table of maxi-fuses

Fuse N°	Rating (A)	Function
MF1*	-	Not used.
MF2*	30	Trailer fuse box.
MF3*	50	Passenger compartment fusebox.
MF4*	80	Built-in systems interface.
MF5*	80	Built-in systems interface.
MF6*	30	Electric parking brake.
MF7*	30	Heated front seats.
MF8*	20	Headlamp wash.

12 V BATTERY

Procedure for charging your battery when it is fl at or for starting the engine using another battery.

ATTENTION BATTERIE SPECIFIQUE IN CAS DE REPLACEMENT DE REPEROR OBLIGATION/REPERENT AUX PARANTIL DUTTERATION ON VEHNICULAR 12v 24v WE HAS INVERES LES POLANTES DE LA BATTERY, UTILISER UN DURAGUEUR 12V QUADJOURANT WARNING SPECIFIC BATTER IN CASE OF REPLACEMENT REFER OBLIGATION AT THE VEHICLE DO NOT REPERE BATTERI POLARITY, USE 12V CHARGER ONLY

The presence of this label indicates the use of a 12 V lead-acid battery with special technology and specification, for which the involvement of a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified workshop is required when replacing or disconnecting the battery.

Failure to observe this recommendation may cause premature wear of the battery.

After refitting the battery, the Stop & Start system will only be active after several hours depending on the climatic conditions and the state of charge of the battery (up to about 8 hours).

The Stop & Start battery does not have to be disconnected for charging.

Access to the battery

Diagram of a vehicle battery pack with a positive charge symbol, shown in 3D layout without any readable text or labels.

The battery is located under the bonnet. To gain access to it:

open the bonnet using the interior release lever, then the exterior safety catch,
secure the bonnet stay,
remove the plastic cover to gain access to the two terminals,
unclip the fusebox to remove the battery, if necessary.

Starting using another battery

Connect the red cable to the positive terminal (+) of the flat battery A, then to the positive terminal (+) of the slave battery B.
Connect one end of the green or black cable to the negative terminal (-) of the slave battery B.
Connect the other end of the green or black cable to the earth point C on your vehicle (engine mounting).

A + B +

A B C

Operate the starter, let the engine run.
Wait until the engine returns to idle and disconnect the cables.

Disconnecting the cables

F Raise the locking tab fully.

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating motion or movement

Reconnecting the cables

Position the open clip 1 of the cable on the positive terminal (+) of the battery.
Press vertically on the clip 1 to position it correctly against the battery.
Lock the clip by spreading the positioning lug and then lowering the tab 2.

Do not force the tab as locking will not be possible if the clip is not positioned correctly; start the procedure again.

Charging the battery using a battery charger

• Disconnect the battery from the vehicle.
  Follow the instructions for use provided by the manufacturer of the charger.
  Reconnect starting with the negative terminal (-).
  Check that the terminals and connectors are clean. If they are covered with sulphate (whitish or greenish deposit), remove them and clean them.

The batteries contain harmful substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be used of in accordance with regu- and must not, in any circum- es, be discarded with household

Take used remote control batteries and vehicle batteries to a special collection point.

It is advisable to disconnect the battery if the vehicle is to be left unused for more than one month.

Do not disconnect the terminals while the engine is running.

Do not charge the batteries without disconnecting the terminals fi rst.

Do not push the vehicle to start the engine if it is fitted with a 6-speed electronic gear control gearbox or an automatic gearbox.

Before disconnecting the battery

Wait 2 minutes after switching off the ignition before disconnecting the battery. Close the windows and the doors before disconnecting the battery.

Following reconnection of the battery

Following reconnection of the battery, switch on the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting to permit initialisation of the electronic systems. However, if problems remain following this operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Referring to the corresponding section, you must yourself reinitialise:

• the remote control key,
• the panoramic sunroof blind,
• the satellite navigation system.

LOAD REDUCTION MODE

System which manages the use of certain functions according to the level of charge remaining in the battery.

When the vehicle is being driven, the load reduction function temporarily deactivates certain functions, such as the air conditioning, the heated rear screen...

The deactivated functions are reactivated automatically as soon as conditions permit.

ENERGY ECONOMY MODE

System which manages the duration of use of certain functions to conserve a sufficient level of charge in the battery.

After the engine has stopped, you can still use functions such as the audio and telematics system, windscreen wipers, dipped beam headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for a maximum combined duration of thirty minutes.

This period may be greatly reduced if the battery is not fully charged.

Switching to economy mode

Once this time has elapsed, a message appears in the screen indicating that the vehicle has switched to economy mode and the active functions are put on standby.

If the telephone is being used at this time:

• t will be maintained for 5 minutes with the hands-free kit of your Peugeot Connect Sound or Peugeot Connect Navigation,
• it will still be possible to finish the call with the Peugeot Connect Media.

Exiting economy mode

These functions are reactivated automatically next time the vehicle is driven.

To restore the use of these functions immediately, start the engine and let it run for at least 5 minutes.

Let the engine run for the duration specified to ensure that the battery charge is sufficient.

Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the engine in order to charge the battery.

A fl at battery prevents the engine from starting (refer to the "Battery" paragraph).

CHANGING A WIPER BLADE

Diagram of a car with directional arrows indicating road or movement (no text or symbols)

Before removing a front wiper blade

Within one minute after switching off the ignition, operate the wiper stalk to position the wiper blades vertically on the windscreen.

Removing

Raise the corresponding wiper arm.
Unclip the wiper blade and remove it.

Fitting

Put the corresponding new wiper blade in place and clip it.
Fold down the wiper arm carefully.

After fitting a front wiper blade

Switch on the ignition.
Operate the wiper stalk again to park the wiper blades.

TOWING THE VEHICLE

Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for towing another vehicle using a removable towing eye.

Access to the tools

Diagram of a car interior showing a vehicle inside the engine compartment with an inset highlighting the engine compartment (no text or symbols present)

The towing eye is installed under the left-hand concertina board, in the boot interior trim.

To gain access to it:

open the boot,
raise the concertina board,
remove the towing eye from the holder.

Towing your vehicle

Abstract graphic with a key icon and upward arrow, no readable text or symbols

On the front bumper, unclip the cover by pressing at the bottom.

Screw the towing eye in fully.
Install the towing bar.
Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the towed vehicle.

Towing another vehicle

Diagram of a car door with a golden key inserted into the seat, showing a purple upward arrow (no text or symbols)

- On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by pressing at the bottom.

Screw the towing eye in fully.
Install the towing bar.
Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the towed vehicle.

Place the gear lever in neutral (position N on the electronic gear control gearbox or automatic gearbox).

Failure to observe this special condition could result in damage to certain braking components and the absence of braking assistance the next time the engine is started.

General recommendations

Observe the legislation in force in your country.

Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is higher than that of the towed vehicle.

The driver must stay at the wheel of the towed vehicle.

Driving on motorways and fast roads is prohibited when towing.

When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, always use an approved towing bar; rope and straps are prohibited.

When towing a vehicle with the engine off, there is no longer any power assistance for braking or steering.

In the following cases, you must always call on a professional recovery service:

• vehicle broken down on a motor-way or fast road,
• when it is not possible to put the gearbox into neutral, unlock the steering, or release the parking brake,
• towing with only two wheels on the ground,
• where there is no approved towing bar available...

TOWING A TRAILER, A CARAVAN, ETC.

Towbar suitable for the attachment of a trailer or caravan with additional lighting and signalling.

Illustration of a blue jet ski scooter being towed by a car, with a purple arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols)

Your vehicle is primarily designed for transporting people and luggage, but it may also be used for towing a trailer.

We recommend the use of genuine PEUGEOT towbars and their harnesses that have been tested and approved from the design stage of your vehicle, and that the fitting of the towbar is entrusted to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

If the towbar is not fitted by PEUGEOT dealer, it is imperative that it is fitted in accordance with the vehicle manufacturer's instructions.

Driving with a trailer places greater demands on the towing vehicle and the driver must take particular care.

Driving advice

Distribution of loads

Distribute the load in the trailer so that the heaviest items are as close as possible to the axle and the nose weight approaches the maximum permitted without exceeding it.

Air density decreases with altitude, thus reducing engine performance. Above 1 000 metres, the maximum towed load must be reduced by 10 % for every 1 000 metres of altitude.

Refer to the "Technical Data" section for details of the weights and towed loads which apply to your vehicle.

Side wind

Take into account the increased sensitivity to side wind.

Cooling

Towing a trailer on a slope increases the temperature of the coolant.

As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling capacity is not dependent on the engine speed.

To lower the engine speed, reduce your speed.

The maximum towed load on a long incline depends on the gradient and the ambient temperature.

In all cases, keep a check on the coolant temperature.

If the warning lamp and the STOP warning lamp come on, stop the vehicle and switch off the engine as soon as possible.

Braking

Towing a trailer increases the braking distance.

To avoid overheating of the brakes on a long mountain type of descent, the use of engine braking is recommended.

Tyres

Check the tyre pressures of the towing vehicle and of the trailer, observing the recommended pressures.

Lighting

Check the electrical lighting and signalling on the trailer.

The rear parking sensors will be deactivated automatically if a genuine PEUGEOT towbar is used.

FITTING ROOF BARS

Illustration of a car with purple arrows pointing to the rear window, showing a close-up of the side panel (no text or symbols present)

When fi tting transverse roof bars, use the four quick-fit fixings provided for this purpose:

lift the concealing flaps,
open the fixing covers on each bar using the key,
put each fixing in place and lock them on the roof one by one,
ensure that roof bars are correctly fitted (by shaking them),
close the fixing covers on each bar using the key.

Maximum authorised weight on the roof rack, for a loading height not exceeding 40 cm (with the exception of bicycle carriers): 65 kg.

If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the speed of the vehicle to the profile of the road to avoid damaging the roof bars and the fi xings on the roof. Be sure to refer to national legislation in order to comply with the regulations for transporting objects that are longer than the vehicle.

Illustration of a car front view with a red X mark and orange checkmark on the roof (no text or symbols)

If your vehicle is fitted with roof finishers, do not use them for carrying loads.

VERY COLD CLIMATE SCREEN

Removable protective screen which prevents the accumulation of snow at the radiator cooling fan.

Before fi tting or removing the screen, ensure that the engine is off and cooling fan has stopped. It is recommended that the screen be fi tted and removed by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Fitting

A A B

Removal

Diagram showing three labeled components (1, 2, 3) on a curved structure with dashed lines and purple icons.

Offer up one of the three screens the front of the lower section of the front bumper (do not use the upper ventilation grille position).

Press on the edges A to engage its fixing clips.
Press on the middle at B to complete the engagement of the fixing clips.
Repeat the operation for the other two screens.

Depending on the model, the clips point either to the left or to the right.

Pass your fingers through the upper grille location.
From behind, push the clips in the opposite direction then pull the part towards you.
Start with the upper screen 1, then the centre screen 2 and finish with the lower screen 3.

Do not forget to remove the very cold climate screen:

• when the ambient temperature exceeds 10 °C,
• when towing,
• at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).

ACCESSORIES

A wide range of accessories and genuine parts is available from the PEUGEOT dealer network.

These accessories and parts have been tested and approved for reliability and safety.

They are all adapted to your vehicle and benefit from PEUGEOT's recommendation and warranty.

"Transport solutions":

For leisure pursuits: roof bars, bicycle carrier on towbar, bicycle carrier on roof bars, ski carrier, roof box, booster seats and child seats, side blinds, under shelf storage.

Trailer towbar, which must be fitted by a PEUGEOT dealer.

"Style":

seat covers compatible with lateral airbags, leather gear lever knob, foglamps, door defl ectors, spoiler, styling strips, alloy wheels, trims, chrome-plated door handle shells.

"Safety and security":

anti-theft alarm, window etching, wheel security bolts, fi rst aid kit, breathalyzer, warning triangle, high visibility vest, stolen vehicle tracking system, dog guard, snow chains.

"Protection":

mats *, boot tray, luggage net, coat hanger fixed on head restraint, stainless steel or carbon fi bre style door sills.

"Multimedia":

audio systems, amplifiers, satellite navigation systems, Bluetooth hands-free system, CD changer, speakers, DVD player, USB Box, front and rear parking sensors, additional Bluetooth wireless headphones, Bluetooth audio headphones mains charger.

Installation of radio communication transmitters

Before installing any after-market radio communication transmitter, you can contact a PEUGEOT dealer for the specification of transmitters which can be fitted (frequency, maximum power, aerial position, specific installation requirements), in line with the Vehicle Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (2004/104/EC).

visibility safety vest, warning triangle and spare bulbs and fuses available in the vehicle.

The fi tting of electrical equipment or accessories which are not recommended by PEUGEOT may result in a failure of your vehicle's electronic system and excessive electrical consumption.

Please note this precaution. You are advised to contact a PEUGEOT representative to be shown the range of recommended equipment and accessories.

You can also obtain cleaning and maintenance products (exterior and interior), products for topping up (screenwash fluid...) and refills (sealant cartridge for the temporary puncture repair kit...) from PEUGEOT dealers.

* To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned and secured correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.

ENGINES AND GEARBOXES
Petrol engine	1.6 litre VTi120 hp	1.6 litre THP156 hp
Gearbox	Manual(5-speed)	Manual(6-speed)	Automatic(6-speed)
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 598		1 598
Bore x stroke (mm) 77 x 85.8		77 x 85.8
Max power: EU standard (kW)	88	115
Max power engine speed (rpm) 6 000			6 000
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 160			240
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 4 250			1 400
Fuel	Unleaded	Unleaded
Catalytic converter	yes	yes
OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)
Engine (with filter replacement)	4.25	4.25
Gearbox - Final drive	-	-

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)

Petrol engine	1.6 litre VTI120 hp		1.6 litre THP156 hp
Gearbox	Manual(5-speed)		Manual (6-speed)/Automatic (6 speed)
Seats	5	7	5	7
- Unladen weight	1 427	1 454	1 460	1 490
- Kerb weight*	1 502	1 532	1 535	1 565
- Payload	573	736	590	735
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)	2 000	2 190	2 050	2 225
- Gross train weight (GTW)on a 12% gradient	3 200	3 290	3 400	3 425
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)on a 10% or 12% gradient	1 200	1 100	1 350	1 200
- Braked trailer ** (with load transfer within the GTW limit)	1 400		1 550	1 500
- Unbraked trailer	750		750
- Recommended nose weight	70		70

The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10% for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C , limit the towed load.

* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).

** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.

ENGINES AND GEARBOXES

Diesel engine	1.6 litre Turbo e-HDi 110 hp		2 litre Turbo HDi 150 hp	2 litre Turbo HDi 163 hp
Gearbox	Manual (6-speed)	Electronic gear control (6-speed)	Manual (6-speed)	Automatic (6-speed)
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 560			1 997
Bore x stroke (mm) 75 x 88.3			85 x 88
Max power: EU standard (kW) 82				110/120
Max power engine speed (rpm)	4 000		3 750
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 270				320/340
Max torque engine speed (rpm)	1 750		2 000
Fuel	Diesel		Diesel
Catalytic converter	yes		yes
Particle emission filter	yes		yes
OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)
Engine (with filter replacement)	3.75		-

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)

Diesel engine	1.6 litre Turbo e-HDi110 hp
Gearbox	Manual(6-speed)		Electronic gear control(6-speed)
Seats	5	7	5	7
- Unladen weight	1 475	1 502	1 475	1 502
- Kerb weight*	1 550	1 578	1 550	1 578
- Payload	595	748	595	748
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)	2 070	2 250	2 070	2 250
- Gross train weight (GTW)on a 12% gradient	3 170	3 250	3 170	3 150
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)on a 10% or 12% gradient	1 100	1 000	1 100	900
- Braked trailer ** (with load transfer within the GTW limit)	1 300	1 300	1 300	1 100
- Unbraked trailer	745	750	745	750
- Recommended nose weight	70		70

The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C , limit the towed load.
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)

Diesel engine	1.6 litre Turbo e-HDi110 hp
Gearbox	Manual(6-speed) Score		Electronic gear control(6-speed) Score
Seats	5	7	5	7
- Unladen weight	1 475	1 502	1 475	1 502
- Kerb weight*	1 550	1 578	1 550	1 578
- Payload	595	748	595	748
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)	2 070	2 250	2 070	2 250
- Gross vehicle weight (MTRA) on a 12% gradient	2 950	2 950	2 920	2 950
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit) on a10% or 12% gradient	880	700	850	700
- Braked trailer ** (with load transfer within the GTW limit)	1 080	900	1 050	900
- Unbraked trailer	745	750	745	700
- Recommended nose weight	70		70

The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country). High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)

Diesel engine	2 litre Turbo HDi150 hp		2 litre Turbo HDi163 hp
Gearbox	Manual(6-speed)		Automatic(6-speed)
Seats	5	7	5	7
- Unladen weight	1 563	1 593	1 589	1 619
- Kerb weight*	1 638	1 668	1 664	1 694
- Payload	562	717	536	711
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)	2 125	2 310	2 125	2 330
- Gross train weight (GTW)on a 12% gradient	3 475		3 53625
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)on a 10% or 12% gradient	1 350	1 200	1 400	1 200
- Braked trailer ** (with load transfer within the GTW limit)	1 550	1 500	1 600	1 500
- Unbraked trailer	750		750
- Recommended nose weight	70		70

The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C , limit the towed load.
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS - 5008 5-seat LCV (in kg)

Engine	1.6 litre Turbo e-HDi 110 hp			2 litre Turbo HDi 150 hp
Gearbox	Manual (6-speed)	Electronic gear control (6-speed)	Manual (6-speed)	Manual (6-speed)
Model codes	9HZ	9HZ	9HR	RHE
- Unladen weight	1 481	1 482	1 481	1 572
- Kerb weight*	1 556	1 557	1 556	1 647
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)**	2 225	2 230	2 200	2 310
- Gross train weight (GTW) on a 12% gradient ***	3 120		3 170	3 475
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10% or 12% gradient ****	895	890	970	1 165
- Braked trailer (with load transfer within the GTW limit)	X	X	X	X
- Unbraked trailer		750		750
- Recommended nose weight		70		70

* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** Exceeding the maximum rear axle weight involves limiting the speed to 50 mph (80 km/h) as defined in point 2.7 of the Directive.
*** Exceeding the gross vehicle weight when the vehicle is towing involves limiting the speed to 50 mph (80 km/h) as defined in point 2.7 of the Directive.
**** Maximum braked trailer weight within the GTW limit; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.

The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10% for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.

High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C , limit the towed load.

DIMENSIONS (IN MM)

1622 - 1647 1531

Front view of a silver car with visible license plate and front dimension lines (no text or symbols on the car itself)

Side profile illustration of a light blue minivan with dimensional annotations (934, 4529, 868) shown in both width and height sections.

IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS

Various visible markings for the identification and tracing of your vehicle.

A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) under the bonnet.

This number is engraved on the bodywork near the damper support.

B. Vehicle identification Number (VIN) on the windscreen lower crossmember.

This number is indicated on a self-adhesive label which is visible through the windscreen.

C. Manufacturer's label.

The VIN is indicated on a self-destroying label affi xed to the door aperture, on the driver's side.

D. Tyre/paint label.

This label is fitted to the door aperture or middle pillar, on the driver's side.

It bears the following information:

• the tyre inflation pressures with and without load,
• the wheel rim and tyre sizes,
• the brands of tyre recommended by the manufacturer,
• the inflation pressure of the spare wheel,
• the paint colour code.

Diagram of a car with labeled parts A, B, C, D and an inset showing a vehicle interior view.

The tyre pressures must be checked when the tyres are cold, at least once a month.

Low tyre pressures increase fuel consumption.

Illustration of a light blue minivan with a circular graphic overlay (no text or symbols)

EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL

EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL

PEUGEOT CONNECT SOS

In an emergency press this button for more than 2 seconds. Flashing of the green LED and a voice message confirm that the call has been made to the PEUGEOT Emergency team*.

Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The green LED goes off.

A press(at any time) of more than 8 seconds on this button, cancels the request.

The green LED remains on (without flashing) when communication is established. It goes off at the end of communication.

This call is dealt with by the PEUGE OT Emergency team which receives locating information from the vehicle and can send a detailed alert to the appropriate emergency services. In countries in which the team is not operational, or when the locating service has been expressly declined, the call is dealt with directly by the emergency services (112) without the vehicle location.

If an impact is detected by the airbag ECU, and independently of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call is made automatically.

* These services are subject to conditions and availability. Consult a PEUGEOT dealer.

PEUGEOT CONNECT ASSISTANCE

Press this buttorfor more than 2 seconds to request assistance if the vehicle breaks down. A voice message confirms that the call has been made*.

Pressing this button a gain immediately cancels the request. The cancellation is confirmed by a voice message.

When the ignition is switched on, the green LED comes on for 3 seconds indicating that the system is operating correctly.

If the orange LED flashes: there is a system fault. If the orange LED is on continuously: the backup battery must be replaced. In either case, contact a PEUGEOT.

If you purchased your vehicle outside the PEUGEOT dealer network, we invite you to have a dealer check the configuration of these services and, if desired, modified to suit your wishes. In a multi-lingual country, configuration is possible in the offi cial national language of your choice.

For technical reasons, particularly to improve the quality of PEUGEOT CONNECT services to customers, the manufacturer reserves the right to carry out updates to the vehicle's on-board telematic system.

EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL USING Peugeot Connect Media

PEUGEOT CONNECT SOS

Warning - the emergency call and the services are only active if the internal telephone is used with a valid SIM card. With a Bluetooth telephone and without a SIM card, these services are not operational.

In an emergency, press the SOS button until an audible signal is heard and a "Confir rmation/Cancellation" screen is displayed (if valid SIM card inserted).

A call is made to the PEUGEOT Emergency team which receives locating information from the vehicle and can send a detailed alert to the relevant emergency services.

In countries in which the team is not operational, or when the locating service has been expressly declined, the call is sent to the emergency services (112).

If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and independently of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call is made automatically.

The message "Deteriorated emergency call" associated with flashing of the orange indicator lamp indicates a malfunction. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer.

PEUGEOT CONNECT ASSISTANCE

Press this button for access to PEUGEOT services.

Select "Customer call" to request any information about the PEUGE OT narg ue.

Customer call

Select "PEUGEOT Assistance" to make a roadside assistance call.

PEUGEOT Assistance

This service is subject to conditions and availability. Consult a PEUGEOT dealer. If you have purchased your vehicle outside the PEUGEOT dealer network, we invite you to have a dealer check the configuration of these services and, if desired, modified to suit your wishes.

MASCENTA MASCENTA 1200Ω 1250Ω 1300Ω 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90

Peugeot Connect Media

MULTIMEDIA AUDIO SYSTEM/BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE GPS EUROPE

The Peugeot Connect Media is protected in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed in another vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer for configuration of the system.

For safety reasons, it is imperative that the driver carries out operations which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.

When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the battery, the Peugeot Connect Media switches off following the activation of the Energy Economy mode.

Certain functions described in this handbook will become available during the course of the year.

CONTENTS

01 First steps p. 223

02 Voice commands and steering mounted controls p. 230

03 General operation p. 233

04 Navigation - Guidance p. 233

05 Traffic information p. 247

06 Radio p. 249

07 Music media players p. 250

08 Using the telephone p. 255

09 Configuration p. 260

10 Screen menu map p. 261

Frequently asked questions p. 65

01 FIRST STEPS

Peugeot Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D) CONTROL PANEL

Access to the Media Menu (audio CD, Jukebox, Auxiliary input). Display the list of tracks. Change the audio source. Access to the Navigation Menu and display recent destinations. Abandon the current operation. Long press: return to main display. Access to the Traffic Menu. Access to the Address book Menu. Access to the Radio Menu Display the list of stations in alphabetical order (FM band) or frequency order (AM band). Audio settings (Balance/ Fader, Bass/Treble, Musical ambience...). Adjust volume (each source is independent, including navigation messages and alerts). Long press: reinitialise the system. Short press: mute. Automatic search down/up for radio frequencies. Select previous/next CD or MP3 track. SD ca d eade r. Short press: clears the last character.

01 FIRST STEPS

Peugeot Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D) NAVIGATOR

Press to left/right:

With display of the "RADIO" screen: select the previous/next frequency.

With display of the "MEDIA" screen: select the previous/next track.

With display of the "MAP" or "NAV": horizontal movement on the map.

Press up/down:

With display of the "RADIO" screen: select the previous/next radio station in the list.

With display of the "MEDIA" screen: select the MP3 folder.

With display of the "MAP" or "NAV": vertical movement on the map.

Go the the next or previous page in a menu.

Movement on the virtual keypad displayed.

OK: confirm the high lighted item.

Select successive display in the screen of "MAP"/"NAV" (if navigation in progress)/"TEL" (if a call is in progress)/"RADIO" or "MEDIA" being played.

CALL: access to the Phone menu.

Bluetooth connection, accept an incoming call.

Top-down view of a car dashboard with circular control buttons and a central 'OK' button (no text or symbols beyond basic UI elements)

Normal display or black screen.

ENDCALL: access to the Phone menu. End a call in progress or reject an incoming call, Bluetooth connection.

Rotate the dial:

With display of the "RADIO" screen: select the previous/next radio station in the list.

With display of the "MEDIA" screen: select the previous/next CD or MP3 track.

With display of the "MAP" or "NAV": zoom the map in/out.

Movement of the menu selection cursor.

02 VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

VOICE COMMANDS - VOICE RECO. INITIATION

1

Before using the system for the first time, you are advised to listen to, say and practice the tutorial.

2

Press the SETUP button and select the "Language & Speech" function. Turn the ring and select "Voice control". Activate voice recognition. Select "Tutorial".

#

The phrases to be spoken according to the context are indicated in the tables below. Speak and Peugeot Connect Media acts.

#

Pressing the end 6 the lighting control stalk activates voice recognition.

CONTEXT	SAY	ACTION
GENERAL	Help address bookHelp voice controlHelp mediaHelp navigationHelp tele phoneHelp radioCancelCorrection	Access to the address book helpAccess to the voice recognition helpAccess to the media management helpAccess to the guidance, navigation helpAccess to the telephone helpAccess to the radio helpto cancel a voice command which is in progressRequest to correct the last voice recognition carried out1Clear
RADIO	Select stationStationfrom the RADIO listRead out station listEnter frequencySelect wave bandAMFMTAo nTAo fi	Select a radio stationSelect a radio station using its RDS descriptionfrom the RADIO listListen to the list of stations availableListen to the frequency of the current radi b stationChoose the frequency waveband (AM or FM)Change the frequency waveband to AMChange the frequency waveband to FMActivate Traffic Info (TA)Deactivate Traffic Info
NAVIGATION	Destination inputVoice advice offVoice advice onSave addressStart guidanceAbort guidanceNavigate entryPOI Search	Command to enter a new destination addressDeactivate the spoken guidance instructionsActivate in e spoken guidance i nstructuresSave an address in the address bookStart guidance (once the address has been entered)Stop the guidancestartguidance to an entry in the address bookStart guidance to a point of interest

02 VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

VOICE COMMANDS - VOICE RECO. INITIATION

CONTEXT	SAY	ACTION
MEDIA	MediaSelect mediaSingle slotJukeboxUSBExternal deviceSD-CardTrack <1 - 1000>Folder <1 - 1000>	Select the MEDIA sourceChoose a sourceSelect the CD player sourceSelect the Jukebox sourceSelect the USB player sourceSelect the audio AUX input sourceSelect the SD card sourceSelect a specific track (number between 1 and 1000) on the active MEDIUMSelect a Folder (number between 1 and 1000) on the active MEDIUM
TELEPHONE	Phone menuEnter numberPhone bookDialSave numberAcceptReject	Open the Telephone MenuEnter a telephone number to be calledOpen the phone bookMake a callSave a number in the phone bookAccept an incoming callReject an incoming call
ADDRESS BOOK	Address book menuCall<entry>Navigate<entry>	Open the address bookCall fi le using itsdescription as described in the address bookStart guidance to an address in the address book using itsdescription

02 VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

Wiper stalk: display "RADIO" and "MEDIA".

Lighting stalk: activate voice commands with a short press; indication of the current navigation instruction with a long press.

Radio: select the previous/next pre-set station. C D audio: select the previous/next track If "MEDIA" is displayed in the screen: MP3 CD/SD CARD/JUKEBOX: select the previous/next folder. S elect the previous next item in the contacts list.

Radio: automatic search for a higher frequency. CD/SD CARD/JUKEBOX: select the next track. CD/SD CARD/JUKEBOX: continuous press: fast forwards.

MEMO ADC

Volume increase.

Change audio source. Start a call from the contacts list Call/hang up the telephone. Confir rm a selection. Press for more than 2 seconds; telephone menu.

Volume decrease.

Mute: press the volume increase and decrease buttons simultaneously. The sound is restored by pressing one of the two v dumebuttons.

Radio: automatic search for a lower frequency. CD/SD CARD/JUKEBOX: select the previous track. CD/SD CARD/JUKEBOX: continuous press: fast backwards.

DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

Press the MODE button several times in succession to gain access to the following displays:

RADIO/MUSIC MEDIA/VIDEO
TELEPHONE (If a conversation is in progress)

graph TD
    A["Document Icon"] --> B["Arrow Left"]
    A --> C["Arrow Right"]
    A --> D["Arrow Bottom"]
    A --> E["Arrow Up"]
    A --> F["Arrow Down"]
    A --> G["Arrow Up again"]

FULL SCREEN MAP
NAVIGATION
(If guidance is in progress)

SETUP:

access to the "SETUP" Menu: system language* and voice functions*, voice initialisation(section 09), date and time*, display, unit and system parameters.

* Available accordirto model.

Long press: access to the GPS coverage and to th demonstration mode. For maintenance of the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth) is recommended, without any additional product.

TRAFFIC:

access to the Traffic Menu: display of the current traffic alerts.

MEDIA:

"DVD-audio" menu "DVD-Video" menu

For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the "Screen menu map" section of this handbook.

DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

Pressing OK gives access to short-cut menus according to the display on the screen.

NAVIGATIONF GUIDANCE IS IN PROGRESS):

1	Abort guidance
1	Repeat advice
1	Block road
2	Unblock
2	More
2	Less
2	Calculate
2	Zoom/Scrdl
2	Browse route
1	Route info
2	Show destination

Trip info

Route type
Avoid
Satellites
Stopovers

Browse route

ZoomScroll

Voice advice

Route options

Route type

Route dynamics

Avoidance criteria

Recalculate

TELEPHONE:

End call
Hold cal
Dial
DTMF-Tones
Private mode
Micro off

MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS:

TA
Play options
Normal order
Random track
Scan
Select media

DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

RADIO:

In FM mode TA RDS Radiotext Regional prog. AM In AM mode TA Refresh AM list FM

FULLSCREEN MAP:

POIs nearby
Position inf
Dial

Guidance options
2 Navigate to
Saveposition
Zoom/Scroll
Map Settings
2D Map
2.5D Map
3D Map

North Up
Heading Up
Zoom/Scroll

AUDIO DVD (LONG PRESS):

Stop

Group

Group 1.2/n

Play options

Normal order/Random track/Scan

TA

Select media

DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

VIDEO DVD (LONG PRESS):

Play 1 2 Stop 3 DVD menus 3 DVD menu 3 DVD top menu 3 List of titles 3 List of chapters 2 DVDOptions 3 Audio 3 Subtitles 3 Angle

Examples:

Illustration of a person standing on a boat with a blue object above, no visible text or symbols

- the map setting which allows the map to be displayed flat, in perspective or in 3D.

Flat map

AVENUE MARCEAU Charles de Guote TMC 5km 17:27 90m

17:19 Map in AVENUE MARCEAU TMC 5km 17:27 90m

n perspective 17:19 Map in 3D AVENUE MARCEAU 17:19 ATMC 5km 17:27 90m 25°C

- configuration of the system by means of voice commands.

The "NAVIGATION" voice commands are listed in section 02. During guidance, a long press on the end of the lighting stalk repeats the last guidance instruction.

Press the NAV button.

Select the "Address input" function and press OK to confirm.

Address input

The list of the last 20 destinations appears under the Navigation Menu function.

Once the country has been selected, turn the ring and select the town function. Press OK to confirm.

Press the NAV button again or select the Navigation Menu function and press OK to confirm.

Select the letters of the town one by one confirring each time by pressing OK.

Select the "Destination input" function and press OK to confirm.

Destination input

A pre-set list (b yentering the first few letters) of the towns in the county selected can be accessed via the LIST button on the virtual keypad.

7		Turn the rig and select OK. PressOK to confi rm.
	To speed up the process, the post code can be entered direct after selecting the "Postal code" function. Use the virtual keypad to enter the letters and digits.
8		Repeat steps 5 to 7 for the "Street" and "House number" functions.
	Select the "Save to address book" function to record the address entered in a directory file. PressOK to confi rm the selection. The Peugeot Connect Media allows more than 4000 contact records to be saved.
	a destination; from steps 1 to 3, select "Choose from last ns". ess on one of the destinations displays a list of actions h you can select:
	Delete entry	Delete list

SETTING AND NAVIGATING TO MY "HOME ADDRESS"

i

To be set as the "Home address", an address must first be entered in the address book, for example from "Destination input"/"Address input" then "Save to address book".

1

Press the NAV button twice to display the Navigation Menu.

Navigation Menu

2

Select "Destination input" and confirm. Then select "Choose from address book" and confirm.

Destination input

3

Select your home address and confi rm. Then select "Edit entry" and confi rm.

Edit entry

4

Select "Set as Home address" and confirm b save.

Set as home address

#

To start navigation towards "Home", press NAV twice to display the Navigation Menu, select "Destination input" and confirm. Then select "Navigate HOME" and confirm to start guidance.

When the map is displayed on the screen, you can select "Map Settings" then "2D Map/2.5D Map/3D Map/North Up/Heading Up". The display of buildings in 3D mode depends on the progress in town mapping.

1		Press the NAV button.
2		Press the NAV button again or select the Navigation Menu function and press OK to confirm.Navig ation Menu
3		Select the "Route options" function and press OK to confirm.Route options
4		Select the "Route type" function and press OK to confirm. This function allows you to change the route type.Route type

	Select the "Route dynamics" function.Thisfunction provides access to the "Traffi c independent", "Semi-dynamic" and "Dynamic" options.
	Route dynamics
	Select the "Avoidance criteria" function. This function provides access to the "Avoid" options (motorways, toll roads, ferries, tunnels).
	Avoidance criteria
	Turn the rig and select the "Recalculate" function to take into account the route options selected. Press OK to confi rm.
	Recalculate

Stopovers can be added to or deleted from the route once the destination has been selected.

1		Press the NAV button.
2		Press the NAV button again or select the "Navigation" Menu function and press OK to confi rm."Navigation" Menu
3		Select the "Stopovers" function and press OK to confi rm.Stopovers
4		Select the "Add stopover" function (5 stopovers maximum) and press OK to confirm.Add stopover

£		Enter a new address, for example.	Address input
€		Once the new address has been entered, select "Start route guidance" and press OK to confirm.Start route guidance
7		Position the stopover on the list and press OK to confi rm.
£	Repeat operations 1 to 7 as many times as necessary then select "Recalculate" and press OK to confirm.
	To charge the stopovers, repeat operations 1 to 3 and select "Rearrang e route" (select a stopover, delete it or move it on the list using the ring to change the order, confi rm its new position and fi nish with "Recalculate").

SEARCHING FOR POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)

The points of interest (POIs) indicate all of the service locations in the vicinity (hotels, various businesses, airports...).

1		Press the NAV button.
2		Press the NAV button again or select the Navigation Menu function and press OK to confi rm.
		Navigation Menu
3		Select the "POI search" function and press OK to confi rm.
		POI search
4		Select the "POI nearby" function to search for POIs around the vehicle.
		POI nearby
5		Select the "POI near destination" function to search for POIs near the point of arrival of the route.
		POI near destination

6		Select the "P1 in city" function to search for POIs in the city required. Select the country then enter the name of the city using the virtual keypad.
		POI in city
	ties present in the country selected can be accessed via the LIST button on the virtual keypad.
7		Select the "POI in country" function to search for POIs in the country required.
		POI in country
8		Select the "POI near route" function to search for POIs near the route.
		POI near route

This icon appears when several POIs are grouped together in the same area. Zooming in on this icon shows details of the POIs.

LIST OF PRINCIPAL POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)

Grid of transportation and utility symbols with icons for fuel, parking, and equipment

Service station

LPG station

Garage

PEUGEOT

Motor racing circuit

Covered car park

Car park

Rest area

Hotel

Restaurant

Refreshment area

Picnic area

Cafeteria

Vertical sequence of icons representing various activities such as transportation, shopping, cycling, and physical activity.

Airport

Railway station

Bus station

Port

Industrial estate

Supermarket

Bank

Vending machine

Tennis court

Swimming pool

Golf course

Winter sports resort

Theatre

Cinema Theme parks Hospital Pharmacy Police station School Post office Museum Tourist information Automatic speed camera* Red light camera* Risk area* * According to availability in the country.

Download the "PIs" update fi le onto an SD card or USB memory stick from the Internet. This service is available at wipinforadars.co.uk.

i

Theles must be copied to the root on the chosen medium.

2

Insert the medium(SD card or USB memory stick) containing the POI database into the system's SD card reader or USB port.

3

Press NAV, select Navigation Menu, then "Settings", then "Update personal POI".

Navigation Menu

Settings

Update personal POI

4

Select the medium ("USB" or "SD-Card") used and press OK.

5

Successful downloading is confirmed by a message.

The system restarts.

The POIs version can be found in the SETUP\System menu.

SPOKEN INSTRUCTION SETTINGS

When the narration is displayed in the screen, press OK then select or deselect "Voice advice" to activate or deactivate the spoken guidance instructions.

Use the volume button to adjust the volume.

The volume of the Risk Areas POIs alert can only be adjusted during this type of alert.

POINTS OF INTEREST AND RISK AREAS SETTINGS

Press the NAV button.

Press the NAV button again or select the Navigation Menu function and press OK to confirm.

Navigation Menu

Select the "Settings" function and press OK to confirm.

Setting s

Select the "POI categories on Map" function to select the POIs to be displayed on the map by default.

POI categories on Map

Select "Separameters for risk areas" to gain access to the "Display on map", "Visual alert" and "Sound alert" functions.

Set parameters for risk areas

05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION

CONFIGURE THE FILTERING AND DISPLAYING OF THE TMC MESSAGES

Press the TRAFFIC button.

The list bTMC messages appears under the Traffic Menu sorted in order of proximity.

Press the TRAFFIC button again or select the Traffic Menu function and press OK to confirm.

Traffi c Menu

Select "Select preferred list" and press OK to confirm.

The TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages provide information relating to traffic and weather conditions, received in real time and transmitted to the driver audibly and visually on the navigation map. The guidance system can then suggest an alternative route.

Select the filter of your choice:

Messages on route

All warning messages

Only warnings on route

All messages

Select "Geo. Filter".

Geo. Filter

When all of the messages on the route are selected, the addition of a geographic filter is recommended (within a radius of 3 miles (5 km) for example) to reduce the number of messages displayed on the map. The geographic filter follows the movement of the vehicle.

The filters are independent and their results are concealed. We recommend:

• afilter over 6 miles (10 km) around the vehicle in heavy traffic,
• afilter over 30 miles (50 km) around the vehicle or a filter on the route on motorway journeys.

05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION

PRINCIPAL TMC SYMBOLS

Black and blue triangle: general information, for example:

Weather reports

Traffic reports

Wind

Fog

Parking

Snow/ice

Red and yellow triangle: traffic information, for example:

Modified signage

Narrow carriageway

Slippery surface

Accident

Delay

Roadworks

Risk of explosion

Road closed

Demonstration

Danger

No entry

Traffic jam

RECEIVING TA MESSAGES

• the station transmits TA messa ges.
• the station does not transmit TA messa ges.
• TA messa are not activated.

The TA Traffic Announcement function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the message.

With the current audio source displayed on the screen, press the dial.

The shortcut menu for the source appears and gives access to:

TA

Select Traffic Announcement(STA) and press the dial to confirm and go to the associated settings.

06 RADIO

SELECTING A STATION

Press the RADIO button to display the list of stations received locally sorted in alphabetical order.

Select the station required by turning the ring and press to confirm.

While listening to the radio, press buttons << and >> for the automatic search for a lower or higher frequency.

When the "RADIO" screen is displayed, turn the ring or use the 4-direction on navigator to select the previous or next station on the list.

Press one of the buttons on the numeric keypad for more than 2 seconds to store the current station. A bleep confirms that it has been stored. Press the button on the numeric keypad to recall the stored radio station.

The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...) may interfere with the reception, including in RDS following mode. This phenomenon is a normal result of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not in any way indicate a failure of the audio equipment.

RDS - REGIONAL MODE

When the current radio station is displayed on the screen, press OK.

The radio source short-cuts menu appears and provides access to the following short-cuts:

graph TD
    A["TA"] --> B["RDS"]
    B --> C["Radiotex1"]
    C --> D["Regional prog."]
    D --> E["AM"]

Select the function required and press OK to confirm togain access to the corresponding settings.

RDS, if displaced, allows you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.

INFORMATION AND ADVICE

The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1, 2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3 and the WMA format, an abbreviation of Windows Media Audio and the property of Microsoft, are audio compression standards which permit the recording of several tens of music files on a single disc.

Connecting an IPod:

To play MP3 typefiles, connect the IPod using the USB port (limited functions).

To play iTunes files, connect the iPod using the auxiliary socket(AUX).

In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard.

If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played correctly.

It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.

In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is recommended.

In order to be read, a USB memoY stick must be formatted to FAT3 2.

The audio equipment will only play audio fi les with the extension ".mp3" with a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbps and the extension ".wma" with a speed of between 5 Kbps and 384 Kbps. It also supports the VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. No other type of file (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.

It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters, without using of special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and displaying problems.

During play exit the "SD-Card" or "USB" source before removing the SD card or the USB memory stick from its port.

To avoid any risk of theft, remove the SD card or the USB memory stick when you leave your vehicle with the roof open.

Insert the audio or MP3CD in the player, the SD card in the card reader or the USB peripheral in the USB port. Play begins automatically.

The list of tracks or MP3/WMA files appears under "Media" Menu.

Press this button.

When the "MEDIA" screen is displayed, turn the ring up or down to select the previous or next compatible source.

Press the MEDIA button.

MP3 CDs, SD cards or USB peripherals are the compatible sources.

Press the MEDIA button again or select the "Media" Menu function and press OK to confirm.

"Media" Menu

Select the "Select media" function and press OK to confirm.

Select media

Select the music source required. Press OK to confirm. Play begins.

The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilation may depend on the recording programme and/or the parameters used. We recommend the ISO 9660 recording standard.

JUKEBOXCOPYING A CD, A USB MEMORY STICK OR AN SD CARDONTO THE HARD DISK			When copying is in progress, switching off the ignition will interrupt theprocess but it will resume directly when the ignition is switched on again.
1Insert an audio MP3 CD, a USBmemory stick or an SD card.			5		Select the tracks required then "Ripselection" or select all of the tracks using"Rip all".
!Check that the active MEDIA source is that of the medium used(CD, USB or SD card).			6		Select "[New folder]" to create a newfolder or select an existing folder(created previously).[New folder]
2MEDIAPress the MEDIA button. Press theMEDIA button again or select MediaMenu and press OK to confirm.			7		"Do you want to change the names of the tracks thatwill be ripped?: select "Yes" to chang e them or "No".Yes No
3Select "Jukebox management" then"Add fi les" andpress OK at each stepto confi rm.Add fi les			8		To copy an MP3CD, then select "Realtime ripping", "Fast ripping"/"High quality(192 kbit/sec)" or "Standard quality(128 kbit/sec)" then select "Start ripping".
4Select "Add files from MP3-Disc" forexample and press OK to validate.Add fi les from MP3-Disc			9		Confirm the warning message bypressing "OK" to start the copy.OK

Check that the active source is not the Jukebox in order to be able to rename or delete a trackf older.
1 Activate the playing of a source other than the Jukebox (CD, radio, etc..).

Press the MEDIA button.

Press the MEDIA button again or select Media Menu and press OK to confirm.

Select "Jukebox management" and press OK to confirm.

Select "Modify content" and press OK co nfirm.

Modify content

Press the MEDIA button again or select Media Menu and press OK to confirm.

Select "Jukebox management" and press OK to confirm.

Select "Play options" and press OK to confirm.

Select "Folders & Files" or "Playlists" then press OK to confirm.

Press the ESC button to return to the first file level.

Playlists can be created in the Jukebox.

Media Menu> Jukebox management> Create new playlist. Add the tracks required one by one then save the change. The "Playlists" play mode must then be selected.

Insert the DVD in the pær. Play begins automatically.

If the DVD does not appear on the screen, press the MODE button to gain access to the "MEDIA" screen which displays the DVD screen.

Press the MEDIA button to gain access to the DVD menu at any time, or to the functions of the Media Menu which adjust the video (brightness/contrast, image format...).

The 4-direction navigator and the chromed ring gallow you to move the DVD selection cursor. Change chapter by pressing the ▶ or ◀ button.

Select the video source required "DVD-Video", "External device (AV)"). Press OK to confirm. Play begins.

USING AN EXTERNAL DEVICE (AUX)

AUDIO/VIDEO/RCA CABLE NOT SUPPLIED

Connect the portable device (MP3 player, camcorder, camera...) to the RCA sockets (white and red for audio; yellow for video) in the glove box using a JACK/RCA audio cable.

Press the MEDIA button then press it again or select the Media Menu function and press OK to confirm.

If the external input is not activated, select "Ext. Device(Aux) management" to activate it.

Select "Select media" then "External device (AV)" and press OK to adviate it.

Select the AUX music source and press OK to confirm. Play begins automatically.

The display and management of the controls is via the portable device.

08 USING THE TELEPHONE

CHOOSING BETWEEN THE BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE/INTERNAL TELEPHONE

To activate the Bluetooth telephone or the internal telephone, press PICK UP.

Select Phone menuthen "Select phone" then choose between "Telephone off", "Use Bluetooth phone" or "Use internal phone". Press OK at each step to confirm.

The system can only be connected to one Bluetooth telephone and one SIM card (Internal telephone) at the same time. In this case, the phone book is synchronised with the Bluetooth telephone.

08 USING THE TELEPHONE

PAIRING A BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE FIRST CONNECTION

The services available via the telephone depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used. Refer to your telephone's manual and your operator to check which services you have access to.

! For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the Peug eotC onnect Media must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on. Visit www.peugeot.co.uk for more information (compatibility, more help, ...).
1 Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and ensure that it is "visible to all" (refer to the telephone instructions).
2	Press the CALL button.
3	If no telephone has been paired, the system prompts you to "Connect phone". Select "Yes" and press OK to confirm.
4	Select "Search phone" and press OK to confirm. Then select the name of the telephone. Search phone

		Enter the authentication code on the telephone. The code to be entered is displayed on the screen of the system.
i	Once the telephone has been connected, the Peugeot Connect Media can synchronise the address book and the call list. This synchronisation may take a few minutes*.
		To pair another telephone, press the TEL button, then select Phone menu, then "Select phone" then "Connect Bluetooth phone" then select the telephone required.PressOK at each step to confirm.
i	Pairing can be started from the telephone (refer to the telephone instructions).
	To delete a pairing, press TEL, select "Connect phone" then "Delete pairing".

08 USING THE TELEPHONE

CONNECTING A BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE

For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the Peugeot Connect Media must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.

Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and ensure that it is visible to all.

Press the ⓂIK UP button.

The list of telephones connected previously (4 maximum) appears in the multifunction screen. Select the telephone required then select "Connect phone" for a new connection. Select "Delete pairing" to cancel the connection to the telephone.

* The services available via the telephone depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used. Refer to your telephone's manual and your operator to check which services you have access to. A list of mobile telephones which offer the best range of services is available from dealers.

Once the telephone has been connected, the Peugeot Connect Media can synchronise the address book and the call list. This synchronisation may take a few minutes *.

08 USING THE TELEPHONE

USING THE INTERNAL TELEPHONE WITH A SIM CARD

If you have declined to use the internal telephone for personal calls, you can still connect a Bluetooth telephone to receive your calls on the vehicle's audio system.

1

Extract the holder by pressing the eject button.

2

Install the SIM card in the holder and then insert it in the slot.

3

To remove the SIM card, repeat step 1.

i

For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the SIM card installation operations must be carried out when stationary.

4

Enter the PIN code on the keypad then select OK and confirm.

Remember PIN

When entering your PIN code, tick the "Remember PIN" tab to allow use of the telephone without having to enter this code when it is used subsequently.

5

Theystem asks "Do you want to switch to the internal phone?", select "Yes" if you wish to use your SIM card for your personal calls. Otherwise, only the emergency call and the services will use the SIM card.

Once the SIM card has been installed, the system can synchronise the address book and the call list. This synchronisation may take af ew minutes.

08 USING THE TELEPHONE

RECEIVING A CALL

An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display in the screen.

Select the "Yes" tab to accept or "No" to refuse and confirm by pressing OK.

The PCK UP button accepts, the HANG UP button rejects the incoming call.

To hang up, press the HANG UP button or press OK and select "End call" then confirm by pressing OK.

End call

Press the end of the steering mounted control to accept the call or end the call in progress.

Operating the telephone while driving is prohibited. It is recommended that you park safely or use in preference the steering mounted controls.

MAKING A CALL

Press the PICK UP button.

The list of the last 20 calls made and received in the vehicle appears under Phone menu. You can select a number and press OK to make the call.

Select the Phone menu function and press OK to confirm.

Select "Dial number", then dial the telephone number using the virtual keypad.

Dial number

It is also possible to select a numbefrom the address book. You can select "Dial from address book". The Peugeot Connect Media can record up to 4 096 entries.

Press the end of the steering mounted control for more than two seconds to open the address book.

It is always possible to start a call directly from the telephone; park the vehicle as a safety measure.

09 CONFIGURATION

SETTING THE DATE AND TIME

This setting operation must be carried outfithe battery has been disconnected.

Press the SETUP button.

Select the "Date & Time" function and press OK to confirm.

Date & Time

Select the "Set date & time" function and press OK to confirm.

Set date & time

Make the adjustments using the ring and move on to the next using the 4-direction navigator. Press OK to oconfirm.

Principle of GPS synchronisation (GMT):

1. Confirm the "ynchronise with GPS" selection, the time is then set to GMT universal time, the date is also updated.
2. Using the 4-direction navigator, move the cursor to the time fields and press OK.
3. You can then use the ring to set the time to the time zone of your choice. Note that when changing between summer/winter time, the time zone must be charged again manually.

Select the "Date format" function and press OK to confirm. Select the format required using the ring and press OK to confirm.

Select the "Time format" function and press OK to confirm. Select the format required using the ring and press OK to confirm.

Pressing the SETUP button for more than 2 seconds permits access to:

Description of the unit

GPS coverage

Demo mode

10 SCREEN MENU MAP

MAIN FUNCTION

OPTIONA

option A1

option A2

OPTION B...

Within 6 miles(10 km)

Within 30 miles(50 km)

Read out setting s

On confirmation

Incoming messages

TMC station information

TRAVES

"Traffic" Menu

Selecpreferred list

Messag es on route

Only warnings on route

All warning messages

All messages

Geo. Filter

Deactivate PIN

Within 2 miles(3 km)

Within 3 miles(5 km)

用法

"Media" Menu

Select media

Audio CD/MP3-Disc DVD-Audio DVD-Video

Jukebox (Folders & Files)

SD-Card

USB

External device (audio/AV)

Jukebox management

Add fi les

Create folder

Modify content

Edit play list

Play options

Folders& Files

Playlists

Memory capacity

Sound settings

Refer to the "Sound settings" menu details of which are shown on the next page.

Video settings

Aspect ratio

Menu language

Display

Brightness

Contrast

Colour

AUX standard Reset video settings Ext. Device (Aux) management Off/Audio/Audio and Video (AV)

"Radio" Menu 1 Waveband 2 FM 3 AN Manual tune Sound settings Refer to the "Sound settings" menu below. 3 Sound settings" Menu 1 BalancFader 2 Bass/Treble 2 Equalizer 3 Linear

"Navigation" Menu 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

Recalculate

Fast route

Short route

Optimized route

POI search

POI nearby

POI near destination

POI in city

POI in country

POI near route

Route options

Route type

POI near destination

Short route

Optimized route

Subscr. service

Settings

Route dynamics

Traffic independent

Semi-dynamic

Dynamic

Avoidance criteria

Avoid motorways

Avoid toll roads

Avoid tunnels

Avoid ferries

Recalculate

"Address book" Menu

Create new entry

Show memory status

Export address book

Delete all voice entries

Delete all entries

Delete folder "My Addresses"

"Phone" menu

Dial numbe

Dial from address book

Call lists

Messages

Select phone

tele phone off

Use Bluetooth phone

Usei nternal phone

Connect Bluetooth phone

Search phone

Disconnect phone

Rename phone

Delete pairing

Delete all pairings

Show details

Settings

Automatic answering system

Select ring tone

Phone/Ring tone volume

Enter mailbox number

Internal phone settings

Automatically accept call

Signal waiting call (?)

Show status

Activate waiting call

Deactivate waiting call

Call forward (?)

Show status

Activate call forward

Deactivate call forward

Suppress own number

Select network

Set network automatically

Set network manually

Search for networks

PIN settings

Change PIN

Activate PIN

Deadivate PIN

Remember PIN

SIM-card memory status

"SETUP" Menu

Language & Speech

Menu language

Deutsch

English

Español

Français

Italia no

Nederlands

Polski

Portuguese

Voice control

Voice control active

Tutorial

Basics

Examples

Tips

Speaker adaptation

New speaker adaptation

Delete speaker adaptation

Voice output volume

Date & Time

Set date & time

Date format

Time format

Display

Brightness

Colour

Steel

blue light (only in day mode)

Orange Ray

Blue Fame

Map colour

4 Day mode for map

Night modefor map

Auto. Day/Night for map

Units

Temperature

Celsius

Fahrenheit

Metric/Imperial

km

Miles

System

Factory reset

Software version

Automatic scrolling

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

The table below groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning the Peugeot Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D).

QUESTION	ANSWER SOLUTIO	N
There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources (radio, CD...).	For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio, CD...).	Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle position, select the musical ambience "Linear" and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
TheCD is ejected automatically or is not played by the player.	The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not recognised by the audio equipment.	- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the right way up.- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be played if it is too damaged.- Check the content in the case of a recorded CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.- The audio equipment's CD player does not play DVDs.- Due to inadequate quality, certain recorded CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The CD player sound is poor.	The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert	good quality CDs and store them in suitable conditions.
	The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable.	Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting an ambience.
The stored stations do not function (no sound, 87.5 Mhz is displayed...).	An incorrect waveband is selected. Press RADI	O, select Radio Menu then "Waveband" to return the waveband on which the stations are sb red.
The quality of reception of the radio station listened to gradually deteriorates or the stored stations do not function (no sound, 87.5 Mhz is displayed...).	The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle is travelling.	Activate the "RDS" function by means of the short-cut menu to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area.
	The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block reception, including in RDS mode.	This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
	The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going through a car wash or into an underground car park).	Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
Sound cut-outs of 1 to 2 seconds in radio mode.	During this briefsound cut-out, the RD S searches for any frequency permitting better reception of the station.	Deactivate the "RDS" function by means of the short-cut menu if the phenomenon is too frequent and always on the same route.
With the engine off, the system switches off after a few minutes of use."TA"s selected. However, certain traffic jams along the route are not indicated in real time.	When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time depends on the battery charge.The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the traffic information.	Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery charge.Wait until the traffic information is being received correctly (displaying of the traffic information symbols on the map).
	In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the traffic information.	This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the traffic information available.
The time taken to calculate a route sometimes seems longer than usual.	The performance of the system may slow down temporarily if a CD/DVD is being copied onto the Jukebox at the same time as a route is being calculated.	Wait until the CD/DVD has been copied or stop the copying before starting the guidance function.
I receive a speed camera alert for a speed camera which is not on my route.	The system announces all speed cameras positioned in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may detect speed cameras located on nearby or parallel roads.	Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of the speed camera.
The speed camera audible warning does not work.	The audible warning is not active.	Activate the audible warning on Navigation Menu, Settings, Set parameters for risk areas.
	The alert volume is set to minimum. Increase the volume of the alert when passin speed camera.	g a
Does the emergency call function work without a SIM card?	No, as certain national regulations impose the presence of a SIM card in order to make an emergency call.	Insert a validSIM card in the slot.
The altitude is not displayed.	On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to receive more than 4 satellites correctly.	Wait until the system has started up completely. Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least 4 satellites (long press on the SETUP button, then select "GPS coverag e").
	Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.	This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the conditions of reception of the GPS signal.
The routeca Icuulation is not successful.	The exclusion criteria may conflict with the current location (exclusion of toll roads on a toll motorway).	Check the exclusion criteria on the Navigation Menu ("Route options" - "Avoidance criteria").
There is a long waiting period following the insertion of a CD.	When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take a few seconds.	This phenomenon is normal.
I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone.	The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the equipment may not be visible.	- Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function is switched on.- Check your telephone is visible.
	The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system.	A list of compatible Bluetooth mobile telephones is available from the dealer network.
The volume of the telephone connected in Bluetooth mode is iraudible.	The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone. Peu	geot Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D) Increase the volume of the , to maximum if required, and increase the volume of the telephone if necessary.
The system does not play the DVD.	The region protection may not be compatible.	Insert DVDs which have compatible region protection.
I cannot copy the CD to the Jukebox.	The wrong source is selected. Chan	ge the active source to CD.
	The CD is copy-protected. It is normal that a protected	CD cannot be copied.
The system does not receive SMS.	The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending of the SMS to the system. Use your SIM card and the internal telephone.
	The SIM card used is a twin card. Use the ori	ginal SIM card to receive the SMS.
I cannot update the risk area POIs.	The Navigation Menu - "Update personal POI" is not displayed.	Check that the medium used for the update (SD card or US B memory stick) is inserted correctly.
	An error message is displayed at the end of the procedure. - Start the procedure a gain in full.- Consult a PEUGE OT dealer if the problem persists.- Check that the data on the MEDIUM is supplied by an official partner of PEUGEOT.
The voicefrequencies (DTMF) are not active when I am communicating and I press numbers on the keypad.	The numeric buttons on the keypad are only active for calls if the display is in telephone mode.	To activate them,press the MODE button until the telephone is displayed on the screen.
An accident area which does not concern me is displayed on the screen.	The accident areas are displayed near a point defined on the map and in relation to a direction of travel.	The alert may be triggered when travelling under a road or near a road which has a speed camera.

VOL RADIO MUSIC SETUP PHONE MODE NAV TRAFFIC ESC ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥

Peugeot Connect Navigation (RNEG)

MULTIMEDIA AUDIO SYSTEM/BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE SATELLITE NAVIGATION SYSTEM FOR EUROPE BY SD CARD

The Pegeot Connect Navigation (RNEG) is protected in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed in another vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer for configuration of the system.

For safety reasons, the driver must carry out operations which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.

When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the battery, the Peugeot Connect Navigation (RNEG) switches off following the activation of the Energy Economy mode.

Certain functions described in this handbook will become available during the year.

CONTENTS

01 First steps p. 272
02 Steering mounted controls p. 273
03 General operation p. 274
04 Navigation - Guidance p. 277
05 Traffic information p. 285
06 Radio p. 287
07 Music media players p. 288
08 Bluetooth telephone p. 291
09 Configuration p. 294
10 Screen menu map p. 295
Frequently asked questions p. 299

01 FIRST STEPS

Peugeot Connect Navigation (RNEG) CONTROL PANEL

Engine not running:

• Short press: on/off.
• Long press: pause with CD play, mute for radio.
  Engine running:
• Short press: pause with CD play, mute for radio.
• Long press: reinitialise the system.

Long press: audio settings: front/rear fader, left/right balance, bass/treble, musical ambience, loudness, automatic volume, reinitialise settings.

Access to the

Radio Menu. Display the list of stations.

Access to the MusicMenu. Display tracks

Selection dial in the

screen display and a cording to the menu. Short press: contextual menu or confirm.

Long press: contextual menu specific to the list displayed.

Access to the "SETUP" men

Long press: GPS coverage and demonstration mode.

Access to the Phone Menu. Display the list of calls.

Adjust volume (each source is independent, including navigation messages and alerts).

Buttons 1 to 6:

Select a pre-set radio station.

Long press: pre-set the current station.

Bluetooth VOL + RADIO MUSIC SETUP PHONE MODE NAV TRAFFIC ESC 1 2 3 4 5 6

Eject CD.

Select previous/next radio station.

Select previous CD or MP3 track.

Selectp previous/next line in a list.

Select previous/next radio station in the list.

Select previous/next MP3 folder.

Select previous/next page in a list.

Access to the "MODE" menu.

Select successive display of:

Radio, Map, NAV (if navigation in progress), Telephone (if conversation in progress), Trip computer.

Long press: Black screen (DARK).

Access to the Navigation Menu. Display recent destinations.

Reader for navigation SD card only.

Access to the Traffic Menu. Display the current traffic alerts.

ESC: abandon current operation.

02 STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

RADIO: select the previous/next pre-set station. Select the next entry in the address book. RADIO: change to the next radio station in the list. Long press: automatic search for a higher frequency. CD: select the next track. CD: continuous press: fast forward play. Volume increase. Change the audio source. Start a call from the address book. Call/End call on the telephone. Press for more than 2 seconds; access to the address book. Volume decrease. RADIO: change to the previous radio station in the List. Long press: automatic search for a lower frequency. CD: select the previous track. CD: continuous press: fast reverse. Mute press the volume increase and decrease buttons simultaneously. Restore the sound by pressing one of the two volume buttons.

Press the MODE button several times in succession for access to the following menus:

RADIO / MUSIC MEDI PLAYERS
TELEPHONE (If a conversation is in progress)
TRIP COMPUTER

graph TD
    A["MODE"] --> B
    B --> C
    C --> D
    D --> A
    style A fill:#99ccff,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#99ccff,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#99ccff,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#99ccff,stroke:#333

FULL SCREEN MAP
NAVIGATION
(If guidance is in progress)

SETUP:

system language*, date and time, display, vehicle settings*, unit and system settings, "Demo mode".

* Available accordirto model.

TRAFFIC:

TMC information and messages.

For cleaning the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth) is recommended, with no additional product.

For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the "Screen menu map" section.

DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

A press on the OK dial gives access to short-cut menus according to the display on the screen.

NAVIGATION (IF GUIDANCE IS IN PROGRESS):

1 Abort guidance 1 Repeat advi ce 1 Block road 1 Route info 2 Show destination 2 Trip info 3 Route type 3 Avoid 3 Satellites

TRIP COMPUTER:

TELEPHONE:

End call Hold call Dial DIMF-Iones Private mode Micro off

DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS:

Traffi c info(TA)

Play options

Normal order

Random track

Repeat folder

Scan

Select music

RADIO:

In FM mode

Traffic info (TA)

RDS

Radiotext

Regional prog.

AM

In AMmode

TA

Refresh AM list

FM

FULISCREEN MAP:

Abort guidance / Resume guidance

Set destination

POIs nearby

Position info

Map settings

Zoom/Scroll

The list 6 the last 20 destinations appears under the Navigation Menu function.

Press the NAV button again or select the Navigation Menu function and press the dial to confirm.

Navigation Menu

Select the "Address input" function and press the dial to confirm.

Address input

Insert the SD card in the front panel reader and leave it there to use the Navigation functions.

The navigation SD card data must not be modified.

Map data updates are available from PEUGEOT dealers.

Select the "Destination input" function and press the dial to confirm.

Destination input

Once the country has been selected, turn the dial and select the town function. Press the dial to confirm.

Select the letters of the town one by one confirming each time by pressing the dial.

A pre-set list (by entering the first few letters) of the towns in the country selected can be accessed via the LIST button on the virtual keypad.

Turn the dial and select OK. Press the dial to confirm.

#

To speed up the process, the post code can be entered directly after selecting the "Postal code" function. Use the virtual keypad to enter the letters and digits.

8

Repeat steps 5 to 7 for the "Street" and "House number" functions.

#

Select the "Save to address book" function to record the address entered in a directory file. Press the dial to confirm the selection. Peugeot Connect Navigation allows up to 500 contact files to be recorded

#

During guidance, pressing the end of the lighting stalk repeats the last guidance instruction.

9

Then select "Start route guidance" and the press the dial to confirm.

Start route guidance

#

Select the route type:

"Fast route", "Short route" or "Optimized route" and press the dial to confirm.

It is also possible to select a destination via "Choose from address book" or "Choose from last destinations".

Choose from last destinations Choose

[Non-Text]

Map settings

You can zoom in/zoom out on the map using the dial.

It is possible to move the map or select its orientation via the short-cut menu of the FULL SCREEN MAP.

Press MODE until the map is displayed full screen. Press the dial then select "Map setting s". Select "2.5D Map" or "2D Map" and in the latter case, select "North Up" or "Heading Up".

#

To clear a destination from steps 1 to 3, select "Choose from last destinations".

Along press on one of the destinations displays a list of actions from which you can select:

Delete entry

Delete list

SETTING AND NAVIGATING TO MY "HOME ADDRESS"

To be set as the "Home address" an address must first be entered in the address book, for example from "Destination input"/"Address input" then "S ave to address book".

Press the NAV button twice to display the Navigation Menu.

Navigation Menu

Select "Destination input" and confirm. Then select "Choose from address book" and confirm.

Destination input

Select "Address book" and confirm. Then select "Search entry (complete address book)" and confirm.

Addressbook

Select your home address and confi rm. Then select "Edit entry" and confi rm.

Edit entry

Select "Set as home address" and confirm to save.

Set as "Home address"

To start navigation towards "Home address", press NAV twice to display the Navigation Menu, select "Destination input" and confirm.

Then select "Navigate HOME" and confirm to start guidance.

1	Press the NAV button.
2	Press the NAV button again or select the Navigation Menu function and press the dial to confi rm%.Navigation Menu
3	Select the "Route options" function and press the dial to confirm.Route options
4	Select the "Route type" function and press the dial to confirm. This function allows you to change the route type.Route type

The route selected by the Peugeot Connect Navigation system depends directly on the route options. Changing these options may change the route completely.

5		Select the "Route dynamics" function.Thisfunction gives access to the "Traffic independent" or "Semi-dynamic" options.
		Route dynamics
6		Select the "Avoidance criteria" function. This function provides access to the AVOID options (motorways, toll roads,f erries).
		Avoidance criteria
7		Turn the dial and select the "Recalculate" function to take into account the route options selected. Press the dial to confirm.
		Recalculate

Stopovers can be added to the route once the destination has been selected.

1	Press the NAV button.
2	Press the NAV button again or select the Navigation Menu function and press the dial to confirm.
	Navigation Menu
3	Select the "Stopovers" function and press the dial to confirm.
	Stopovers
4	Select the "Add stopover" function (5 stopovers maximum) and press the dial to confirm.	[IMAGE]
	Add stopover

5	Enter a new addressfor example.
	Address input
6	Once the new address has been entered, select OK and press the dial to confirm.
	OK
7	Select "Recalculate" and press the dial to confirm.
	Reca IcuIuate

6	Once the new address has been entered, select OK and press the dial to confirm.	OK
7	Select "Recalculate" and press the dial to confirm.	Reca IcuIate

The stopover must be completed or deleted in order for the guidance to continue to the next destination. Otherwise, the Peugeot Connect Navigation will always return you to the previous stopover.

SEARCHING FOR POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)

The points of interest (POI) indicate all of the service locations in the vicinity (hotels, various businesses, airports...).

6 Select the "POI in city" function to search for POIs in the city required. Select the country then enter the name of the city using the virtual keypad. POI in city

A list of cities present in the country selected can be accessed via the LIST button on the virtual keypad.

7 Select the "POI in country" function to search for POIs in the country required. POI in country 8 Select the "POI near route" function to search for POIs near the route. POI near route

This icon appears when several POIs are grouped together in the same area. Zooming in on this icon shows details of the POIs.

LIST OF PRINCIPAL POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)

Service station

LPG station

Garage

PEUGEOT

Motor racing circuit

Covered car park

Car park

Rest area

Hotel

Restaurant

Refreshment area

Picnic area

Cafeteria

Airport

Railway station

Bus station

Port

Industrial estate

Supermarket

Bank

Vending machine

Tennis court

Swimming pool

Golf course

Winter sports resort

Theatre

Cinema

Theme parks

Hospital

Pharmacy

Police station

School

Post office

Museum

Tourist information

Automatic speed camera*

Red light camera*

Risk area*

* According to availability in the country.

Press the NAV button again or select the Navigation Menu function and press the dial to confirm.

Navigation Menu

3

Select the "Settings" function and press the dial to confirm.

4

Select the "Navi volume" function and turn the dial to set the volume of each voice synthesiser (traffic information, alert messages...).

Navi volume

i

To activate or deactivate vocal guidance, with guidance active and the map displayed in the screen, press the dial and then select or deselect "Voice advice".

Voice advice

#

The adjustment of the volume for the Risk Areas POIs is used only during the transmission of an alert.

5

Select the "POI categories on Map" function to select the POIs to be displayed on the map by default.

POI categories on Map

6

Select "Set parameters for risk areas" for access to the "Display on map", "Visual alert" and "Sound alert" functions.

Set parameters for risk areas

i

UPDATING POIs

The detailed procedure for updating POIs is available at the following internet address: wipinforadars.co.uk. This requires an SDHC(High Capacity) compatible reader.

05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION

CONFIGURE THE FILTERING AND DISPLAY OF TMC MESSAGES

Press the TRAFFIC button.

The list of TMC messages appears under the Traffic Menu sorted in order of proximity.

Press the TRAFFIC button again or select the Traffic Menu function and press the dial to confirm.

Traffi c Menu

Select the filter of your choice:

Messages on route

All warning messages

Only warnings on route

All messages

The messages appear on the map and do n the list.

To exit, press ESC.

TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages contain information on traffic and weather conditions, received in real time and transmitted to the driver in the form of audible announcements and symbols on the navigation map.

The navigation system can then suggest an alternative route to avoid a traffic problem.

Select the "Geo. Filter" function and press the dial to confirm.

Geo. Filter

Then select the radius of the filter in miles (km) required in accordance with the route, press the dial to confirm.

When all of the messages on the route are selected, the addition of a geographical filter is recommended (within a radius of 3 miles (5 km) for example) to reduce the number of messages displayed on the map. The geographical filter follows the movement of the vehicle.

The filters are independent and their results are cumulative.

We recommend a filter on the route and a filter around the vehicle of:

• 2 or 3 miles (5 km) for a region with heavy traffic,
• 6 mileskm) for a region with normal traffic c,
• 30 m(Boskm) for long journeys (motorway).

05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION

PRINCIPAL TMC SYMBOLS

1 Black and blue triangle: general information, for example:

Weather reports

Wind

Parking

Traffic reports

Fog

Snow/ice

2 Red and yellow triangle: traffic information, for example:

Modified signage

Slippery surface

Delay

Risk of explosion

Demonstration

No entry

Narrow carriageway

Accident

Roadworks

Road closed

Danger

Traffic jam

RECEIVING TA MESSAGES

• the station transmits TA messages.
• the station does not transmit TA messages.
• TA messages are not activated.

The TA Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the message.

With the current audio source displayed on the screen, press the dial.

The shortcut menu for the source appears and gives access to:

TA

Select Traffic Announcement(STA) and press the dial to confirm and go to the associated settings.

06 RADIO

SELECTING A STATION

1

Press the RADIO button to display the list of stations received locally sorted in alphabetical order. Select the station required by turning the dial and press to confirm.

While listening to the radio, press one of the buttons to select the previous or next station on the list.

A log press of one of the buttons starts the automatic search for astation with a lower or higher frequency.

Press one of the buttons on the numeric keypad for more than 2 seconds to store the current station. Press the button on the numeric keypad to recall the stored radio station.

The external environment(hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...) may interfere with the reception, including in RDS following mode. This phenomenon is a normal result of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not in any way indicate a failure of the audio equipment.

RDS - REGIONAL MODE

1

When the current radio station is displayed on the screen, press the dia 1.

2

The radio source short-cuts menu appears and provides access to the following short-cuts:

TA

RDS

Ra dbtex t

Regional prog.

AM

3

Select the function required and press the dial to confirm to gain access to the corresponding settings.

RDS, if displayed, allows you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the entire country as radio stations do not cover 100% of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.

The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1, 2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3 and the WMA format, an abbreviation of Windows Media Audio and the property of Microsoft, are audio compression standards which permit the recording of several tens of music files on a single disc.

In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard.

If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played correctly.

It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.

In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is recommended.

The Pegeot Connect Navigation will only play audio fi les with the extension ".mp3" with a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbps and the extension ".wma" with a speed of between 5 Kbps and 384 Kbps.

It also supports the VBR(Variable Bit Rate) mode. No other type of file (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.

It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters without using special characters( eg . : " ? ; ü) to avoid any play or display problems.

The list of tracks or MP3/WMA files appears under Music Menu.

2

Press the MUSIC button again or select the Music Menu function and press the dial to confirm.

Music Menu

3

Select the "Select music" function and press the dial to confirm.

Select music

4

Select the music source required: CD, MP3/WMA CD. Press the dial to confirm. Playbegins.

5

Press the up or down button to select the next/previous folder.

6

Press one of the buttons to select a music track. Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forward or rewind play.

The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilation may depend on the recording programme and/or the settings used. We recommend the ISO 9660 tile standard.

USING THE EXTERNAL INPUT (AUX)

JACK/USB AUDIO CABLE NOT SUPPLIED

Connect the portable device (MP3/WMA player...) to the auxiliary JACK socket or to the USB port, using a suitable audio cable.

Press the MUSIC button then press it again or select the Music Menu function and press the dial to confirm.

Music Menu

Select the "External device" function and press the dial to activate it.

External device

Select the AUX music source and press the dial to confirm. Play begins automatically.

The display and management of the controls is via the portable device.

08 BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE

PAIRING A TELEPHONE FIRST CONNECTION

For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the Peugeot Connect Navigation must be carried out with the vehicle stationary. The ignition must be on.

Visit www.peugeot.co.uk for more information (compatibility, more help, ...).

Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and ensure that it is "visible to all" (refer to the telephone instructions).

Press the PHONE button.

* The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Check the telephone manual and with your network provider for details of the services available to you.

For first connection, select "Search phone" and press the dial to confirm. Then select the name of the telephone.

Search phone

Enter the authentication code on the telephone. The code to be entered is displayed on the screen of the system.

Some telephones offer automatic reconnection of the telephone every time the ignition is switched on.

A message confirms the pairing.

Pairing can also be started from the telephone (refer to the telephone instructions).

Once the telephone has been connected, Peugeot Connect Navigation can synchronise the address book and the call list. This synchronisation may take a few minutes *.

To change the teleph one connected, press the PHONE button, then select Phone Menu and press the dial to confirm.

08 BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE

CONNECTING A TELEPHONE

For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the Peugeot Connect Navigation must be carried out with the vehicle stationary. The ignition must be on.

Visit www.peugeot.co.uk for more information (compatibility, more help, ...).

Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and ensure that it is "visible to all" (refer to the telephone instructions).

The last telephone connected is reconnected automatically.

A message confirms the connection.

Press the PHONE button.

The list of telephones connected previously (4 maximum) appears on the multifunction screen. Select the telephone required for a new connection.

* The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Check the telephone manual and with your network provider for details of the services available to you.

Once the telephone has been connected, Peugeot Connect Navigation can synchronise the address book and the call list. This synchronisation may take a few minutes*.

When a telephone is already connected, to change it press the PHONE button, then select Phone Menu and press the dial to confirm.

Select "Connect phone". Select the telephone and press to confirm.

08 BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE

RECEIVING A CALL MAKING A CALL

An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display on the multifunction screen.

Select the "Yes" tab to accept or "No" to refuse and confirm by pressing the dial.

Yes

Nc

To hang up, press the PHONE button or press the dial and select "End call" then confirm by pressing the dial.

End call

Press the end of the steering mounted control to accept the call or end the call in progress.

Press the PHONE button.

The list of the last 2 calls made and received in the vehicle appears under Phone Menu. You can select a number and press the dial to make the call.

Select the Phone Menu function and press the dial to confirm.

Phone Menu

Select "Dial number", then dial the telephone number using the virtual keypad.

Dial number

It is also possible to select a number from the address book. You can select "Dial from address book". The Peugeot Connect Navigation can record up to 1 000 entries (telephone numbers). Press the end of the steering mounted control for more than two seconds to gain access to the address book.

It is possible to make a call directly from the telephone; park the vehicle as a safety measure.

To delete a number, press the PHONE button then press and hold on a call number to display a list of actions including: Delete entry Deletelist

09 CONFIGURATION

SETTING THE DATE AND TIME

The SETUP function gives access to the following options: System language, Date & Time, Display (Brightness, Colour, Map colour), Vehicle, Units, System.

These settings must be entered again if the battery has been disconnected.

Press the SETUP button.

Select the "Date & Time" function and press the dial to confirm.

Date & Time

Select the "Set date & time" function and press the dial to confirm.

Set date & time

Adjust the setting s one by one using the direction arrows and confirm by means of the ed ial.

Select the "Date format" function and press the dial to confirm.

Confirm the format required using the dial. Select the "Time format" function and press the dial to confirm.

Confirm the format required using the dial. Pressing the SETUP button for more than 2 seconds gives access to:

Description of the unit

GPS coverag €

Demo mode

10 SCREEN MENU MAP

MAIN FUNCTION

OPTION A

option A1

option A2

OPTION B...

Within 6 miles (10 km)

Within 30 miles (50 km)

Within 60 miles (100 km)

Vocal

Loudness

Speed dependent volume

Reset sound settings

"Traffic" Menu

Messages on route

Only warnings on route

A ll warning messages

All messages

Geo. Filter

within 2 miles (3 km)

Within 3 miles (5 km)

"Music" Menu

Select music

Sound settings

Balance/Fader

Bass/Treble

Equalizer

Linear

Classic

Jazz

Rock/Pφ

Techno

"Radio" Menu

Waveband

FM

AM

Manual tune

Sound settings

Balance/Fader

Bass/Treble

Equalizer

Linear

"Navigation" Menu 1 2 Abort guidance/Resume guidance 2 Destination Input 3 Enter new address 4 Country 5 City 6 Street 7 House number

Start routeguidance Postal code Save to address book Intersection City district Geoposition Map Navigate HOME Choose from address book Choose from last destinations TMC station information Stopovers Add stopover Address input Navigate HOME Choose from address book Choose from last destinations

"Phone" Menu 1 2 Dial number 2 Dial from address book 2 Call lists 2 Connect phone 3 Search phone 3 Phones connected 4 Disconnect phone 4 Rename phone 4 Delete pair ring 4 Delete all pair rings 4 Show details 2 Settings 3 Select ring tone 3 Phone/Ring tone volume 3 Enter mailbox number

"SETUP" menu 1 System language * 2 Deutsch 3 Eng lish 3 Español 3 Français 3 Italiano 3 Nederlands 3 Polski 3 Portuguese 2 Date & Time * 3 Set date & time 3 Date format 3 Time format

* Available according to model.

Blank white image with no visible content, text, or symbols

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

QUESTION	ANSWER SOLUTIO	N
There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources (radio, CD...).	For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio, CD...).	Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle position, select the Linear musical ambience and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
TheCD is ejected automatically or is not played by the player.	The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not recognised by the audio equipment.	- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the right way up.- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be played if it is too damaged.- Check the content in the case of a recorded CD: consult the advice in the Audio section.- The audio equipment's CD player does not play DVDs.- Becausef their quality level, certain writeable CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The CD player sound is poor.	The CD used is scratched or of poor quality.	good quality CDs and store them in suitable conditions.
	The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable.	Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting an ambience.
The stored stations do not function (no sound, 87.5 Mhz is displayed...).	An incorrect waveband is selected. Pr	ess the BAND AST button to return to the waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which the stations are stored.
The quality of reception of the radio station listened to gradually deteriorates or the stored stations do not function (no sound, 87.5 Mhz is displayed...).	The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle is travelling.	Activate the RDS function to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area.
	The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block reception, including in RDS mode.	This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
	The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going through a car wash or into an underground car park).	Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
Sound cut-outs of 1 to 2 seconds in radio mode.	During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency permitting better reception of the station.	Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is too frequent and always on the same route.
With the engine off, the audio equipment switches off after a few minutes of fuse.	When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating time depends on the battery charge.The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.	Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery charge.
TA is selected. However, certain traffic jams along the route are not indicated in real time.	On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the traffic information.	Wait until the traffic information is being received correctly (displaying of the traffic information symbols on the map).
	In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the traffic information.	This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the traffic information available.
I receive a speed camera alert for a camera which is not on my route.	The system announces all speed cameras located in a conical zone forward of the vehicle. It may detect speed cameras on nearby or parallel roads.	Zoom the map to view the exact position of the speed camera.
The audible speed camera alert is not working.	Audible alerts are not active.	Activate audible alerts in Navigation Menu, Settings, Set parameters for risk areas.
	The alert volume level is set to minimum.	Increase the spee
The altitude is not displayed.	On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to receive more than 3 satellites correctly.	Wait until the system has started up completely. Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least 3 satellites (long press on the SETUP button, then select GPS coverage).
	Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.	This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the conditions of reception of the GPS signal.
The route is not calculated successfully.	The exclusion criteria may conflict with the current location (exclusion of toll roads on a motorway with tolls).	Check the exclusion criteria.
There is a long waiting time after inserting a CD.	When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take a few seconds.	This phenomenon is normal.
I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone.	The telephone's Bluetooth function may be deactivated or the equipment may not be visible.	- Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function is activated.- Check that your telephone is visible.
A telephone connected by Bluetooth is inaudible.	The volume level depends on both the system and the telephone. Increase	the Peu geot Connect Navigation volume setting, possibly to maximum, and increase the telephone volume level if necessary.

TA / PTV SOURCE BAND LIST 1 2 3 4 5 6 MOSO GAIN

Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5)

AUDIO SYSTEM/BLUETOOTH

Your Pegeot Connect Sound (RD5) is coded in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed in another vehicle, contact your PEUGEOT dealer for configuration of the system.

For safety reasons, the driver must carry out operations which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.

When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the battery, the audio equipment may switch off after a few minutes.

CONTENTS

01 First steps p. 304

02 Steering mounted controls p. 305

03 Main menu p. 306

04 Audio p. 307

05 Peugeot Connect USB p. 310

06 Bluetooth p. 313

07 Configuration p. 316

08 Screen menu map p. 318

Frequently asked questions p. 323

01 FIRST STEPS

Select source: radio, audio CD/MP3CD, USB, Jack connection, Streaming, AUX. Select wavebands FM1, FM2, FMast and AM. Audio settings: front/ rear fader, left/right balance, bass/treble, loudness, audio ambiences. Display the list of local stations. Long press: CD tracks or MP3 folders (CD/USB). Abandon the current operation. Eject CD. TA (Traffi c Announcements) on/off. Long press: PTY *(radio Programme TYPc) mode. Select the screen display mode: Date, audio functions, trip computer, telep hone. On/off, volume setting. Automatic frequency search down/up. Select previous/next CD, MP3 or US B track. Confirm. for improved driving comfort at night. 1st press: upper bar only illuminated. 2 nc press: black screen. 3rd press: return to standard display. Buttons 1 to 6: Select a pre-set radio station. Long press: pre-set a station. Display main menu. The SARK next frequency is open screen display Select previous/next MP3 folder. Select previous/next folder/genre/ artist/playlist (USB). * Available according to version.

02 STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

Radio: select the previous/next pre-set station.

USB: select genre/artist/folder from the classification list.

Select the previous/next item in a menu.

Radio: automatic search for a higher frequency.

CD/MP3/USB: selection of the next track.

CD/USB: continuous press: fast forwards play.

Move in the list.

Diagram of a device's internal components with directional arrows and labels (MEMO, SMC), no readable text or symbols beyond basic design lines.

Volume increase.

Charge audio source.

Confirm a selection.

Call/harg up telephone.

Press for more than 2 seconds: telephone main menu.

Volume decrease.

Mute: press the volume increase and decrease buttons simultaneously. The output is met and

The sound is restored by pressing one of the two volume buttons.

Radio: automatic search for a lower frequency.

CD/MP3/USB: selection of the previous track.

CD/USB: continuous press: fast reverse. Move in the list.

03 MAIN MENU

AUDIO FUNCTIONS:

radio, C D, USB, options.

TELEPHONE:

Bluetooth hands-free, pairing, management of a call.

MONOCHROME SCREEN C

Four orange icons representing music, audio, keyboard, and mobile device with Chinese labels

TRIP COMPUTER:

entering of distances, alerts, status of functions.

PERSONALISATION-

CONFIGURATION:

vehicle parameters, display, languages.

MONOCHROME SCREEN A

01:17 20° 27 MAR 2011 LO ROS TH

For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the "Screen menu map" section.

04 AUDIO

RADIO SELECTING A STATION

Press theSOURCE button several times in succession and select the radio.

Press the BAND AST button to select a waveband: FM1, FM2, FMast, AM.

Brief press one of the buttons to carry out an automatic search of the radio stations.

Press one 6 the buttons to carry out a manual search up/down for radio frequencies.

Press the L\$T REFRESH button to display the list of stations received locally (30 stations maximum). To update this list, press for more than two seconds.

The external environment(hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks, ...) may block reception, including in RDS mode. This is a normal effect of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not indicate any failure of the audio system.

RDS

Press the MENU button.

Select AUDIO FUNCTIONS then pressOK.

Select the FM WAVEBAND PREFERENCES function then pressO K.

Select ACTIVATE RDS then press OK. RDS appears on the screen.

In radio mode, press OK directly to activate/deactivate RDS mode.

The RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the country as radio stations do not cover 100% of the territory. Under conditions of very weak reception, the system may change to a regional station.

04 AUDIO

RECEIVING TA MESSAGES

The TA Traffic Announcement function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the message.

Press the TAbutton to activate or deactivate traffic messages.

CD

PLAYING A CD

Insert circular compact discs only.

Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs or CDs copied using a personal recorder, may cause faults which are no reflection on the quality of the original player.

Without pressing the EJECT button, insert a CD in the player, play begins automatically.

To play a disc which has already been inserted, press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select CD.

Press one of the buttons to select a track on the CD.

Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of tracks on the CD.

Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forward or backward

04 AUDIO

MP3 CD PLAYING AN MP3 COMPILATION

Insert an MP3 compilation in the player.

The audio equipment searches for all of the music tracks, which may take anything between a few seconds and several tens of seconds, before play begins.

On a single disc, the CD player can read up to 255 MP3 tiles spread over 8 folder levels. However, it is advisable to keep to a limit of two levels to reduce the access time before the CD is played.

While theCD is being played, the folder structure is not followed. All of the fi les are displayed on a single level.

To play a disc which as already been inserted, press the SOURCE button on several times in succession and select CD.

Press one of the buttons to select a track on the CD.

Press the IS T REFRESH button to display the list of directories of the MP3 compilation.

Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forward or backward play.

MP3 CD

INFORMATION AND ADVICE

The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1.2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3, is an audio compression standard which permits the recording of several tens of music files on a single disc.

In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording, the ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet file format is recommended.

If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be played correctly.

It is recommended that the same recording format is always used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.

In the particular case of a multi-session C D, the Joliet format is recommended.

The audio system will only play fi les with the extension ".mp3" with a sampling rate of 22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of tile (.wma, .mp4, .m3u...) can be played.

It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters without using special characters (e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying problems.

Empty CDs are not recognised and may damage the system.

05 PEUGEOT CONNECT USB

USING THE PEUGEOT CONNECT USB The list of compatible equipment and the compression rates supported are available from PEUGEOT dealers.

1This unit consists ofa USB port and an auxiliary Jack socket*. The audio files are transmitted from portable equipment - digital play er or a USB memory stick - toy our Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5) and heard via the vehicle's speakers.
2USB memgr stick(1.1, 1.2 and 2.0) or Apple® player of generation 5 or later:- SUB memory sticks should be formatted FAT or FAT 32 (NTFS not supported),- the Applayer lead is essential,- navigation through the file database is also possible bymeans of the steering mounted controls.
3Other AppleTM players of earlier generations and players using the MTP protocol * :- plavia Jack-Jack lead only (not supplied),- navigation through the file database is from the portable device.

CONNECTING A USB MEMORY STICK

Connect the memory stick to the port, directly or using a lead. If the audio equipment is switched on, the USB source is detected as soon as it is connected. Play begins automatically after a delay which depends on the capacity of the USB memory stick. Thefile formats supported are .mp3 (mpeg1 layer 3 only), .wma (standard 9 only, 128 kbits/sec compression), .wav and .ogg. Certain playlist formats are supported (m3u, ...). On reconnection of the previous memory stick used, play is resumed automatically with the last track played.

The system puts together playlists (temporary memory) created over a period which depends on the capacity of the USB device. The other sources are available during this time. The playlists are updated each time the ignition is switched off or each time a USB memory stick is connected. When connecting for the first time, the classification suggested is by folder. When you reconnect, the classification selected previously is retained.

* According to vehicle.

05 PEUGEOT CONNECT USB

USING THE PEUGEOT CONNECT USB

2	Press and hold L$T to display the different class itcations. Select by Folder/Artist/Genre/Playlist, press OK to select the classifi cation required, then press OK again to confi rm.
	-ybFolder: all folders containing audio files recognised on the peripheral device. -by Artist: all of the artist names defined in the ID3 Tags, classified in alphabetical order. -ybGenre: all of the genres defi ned in the ID3 Tag s. -ybPlaylist: in accordance with the playlists recorded on the USB device.
	Press LIST briefl to display the previously selected classifi cation.
	Navigate through the list using the left/right and up/down buttons. Confirm the selection by pressing OK.

	Press one of these buttons to gain access to the previous/next track on the classifi cation list currently being play ed. Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forward or backward play.
	Press one of these buttons to gain access to the previous/next Genre, Fdder, Artist or Playlist on the classifi cation list currently being play ed.

CONNECTING AN APPL® PLAYER VIA THE USB PORT

1	The lists available are Artist, Genre and Playlist (as defined in the Apple® player)Selection and Navigation are described in steps 1 to 4 above.
!	Do not connect a hard disk of USB connection device other than audio equipment to the USB port. This could damage your installation.

05 PEUGEOT CONNECT USB

USING THE AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX)

JACK socket or USB port (according to vehicle)

ADJUSTING THE VOLUME OF THE AUXILIARY SOURCE

The auxiliary input, JACK or USB, allows the connection of a portable device (MP3 player...).

Do not connect a device to both the ACK socket and the USB port at the same time.

Connect the portable device(MP3 player...) to the JACK socket or to the USB port, using a suitable cable (not supplied).

Press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select AUX.

First adjust the volume of your portable device.

Then adjust the volume of your audio system.

The display and control is via the portable device.

06 BLUETOOTH

BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE

SCREEN C

(Available according to model and version)

PAIRING A TELEPHONE/FIR T CONNECTION

For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing of the Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio equipment must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.

Go to www.peug eot.co.uk for more information (compatibility, more help, ...).

Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function.

Press the MENU button.

In the menu, select:

• Bluetooth telephofunction - Audio
• Bluetooth confiation
• Perform a Bluetooth search

A window is displayed with a message that a search is in progress.

The services offered depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used.

Consult your telephone's manual and your operator to find out which services are available to you.

The first 4 telephones recognised are displayed in this window.

The TELEPHONE menu permits access to the following functions in particular: Directory *, Call list, Pairign management.

* If your telephone is fully compatible.

Select the telephone to be connected from the list. Only one telephone can be connected at a time.

A virtual keypad is displayed in the screen: enter a code with at least 4 digits. Confirm by pressing OK.

A message is displayed in the screen of the telephone chosen. To accept the pairing, enter the same code on the telephone, then confirm with OK.

If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not limited.

A message that the pairing has been successful appears in the screen.

The automatic connection authorised is only active after the telephone has been configured. The directory and the call list can be accessed after the synchronisation period.

06 BLUETOOTH

RECEIVING A CALL

An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display in the vehicle's screen.

Select the YES tab on the display using the buttons and confirm by pressing OK.

Press the steering mounted control to accept the call.

MAKING A CALL

From the Bluetooth telephone function Audio menu, select Manage the telephone call then Call, Call list or Directory.

Press the steerig mounted control for more than two seconds for access to your directory, then navigate with the thumb wheel.

Or

To dial a number, use your telephone's keypad, with the vehicle stationary.

ENDING A CALL

Durig a call, press the steering mounted control for more than 2 seconds.

Confirm with OK to end the call.

06 BLUETOOTH

BLUETOOTH AUDIO STREAMING \*

Wireless transmission of the telephone's music files via the audio equipment. The telephone must be able to manage the appropriate Bluetooth profiles (Profiles A2DP/AVRCP).

Initiate the pairig between the telephone and the vehicle. This pairing can be initiated from the vehicle's telephone function menu or via the telephone's keypad. See steps 1 to 9 on the previous pages. During the pairing phase, the vehicle must be stationary with the key in the ignition.

Select the telephone to be connected from the telephone function menu. The audio system connects to a newly paired telephone automatically.

Activate the streamig source by pressing the SOURCE button **. The tracks to be played can be controlled as usual via the buttons on the audio system control panel and the steering mounted controls**. The contextual information can be displayed on the screen.

* Depending on the compatibility bthe telephone.
** In certain cases, playing of the Audio files must be initiated from the keypad.
*** If the telephone supports the function.

07 CONFIGURATION

SETTING THE DATE AND TIME

SCREEN A

1	Press the MENU button.
2	Using the arrows, select DISPLAY CONGIGURATION.
3	Press to confirm the selection.
4	Using the arrows, select YEAR.

5	Press to confirm the selection.
6	Adjust the setting.
7	Press to confirm the selection.
8	Start again from step 1 then set MONTH, DAY, HOUR, MINUTES.

07 CONFIGURATION

SCREEN C

SETTING THE DATE AND TIME

1	Press the MENU button.	[zCKS]
2	Using the arrows, select PERSONALISATION CONFIGURATION.
3	Press to confirm the selection.
4	Using the arrows, select DISPLAY CONFIGURATION.

08 SCREEN MENU MAP

MONOCHROME A

RADIO-CD 1 2 RDS SEARCH 2 REG MODE 2 CD REPEAT 2 RANDOM PLAY

MAIN FUNCTION 1 OPTIONA 2 OPTION A1 3 OPTION A2 3 OPTION B... 2

VEHICLE CONFIG * REV WIPE ACT GUIDE LAMPS

OPTIONS 1 2 DIAGNOSTICS 3 CONSULT 3 ABANDON

UNITS 1 2 TEMPERATURE: °CELSIUS/ °FAHRENHEIT FUEL CONSUMPTION: KM/L - L/100 - MPG 2

* The parameters were according to vehicle.

08 SCREEN MENU MAP

DISPLAY ADJUST

YEAR

MONTH

DATE

HOUR

MINUTES

12 H/24 H MODE

LANGUAGE

FRANCAIS

ITALIANO

NEDERLANDS

PORTUGUES

PORTUGUES-BRASIL

DEUTSCH

ENGLISH

ESPANOL

08 SCREEN MENU MAP

MONOCHROME C

Press the OK dial for access to short-cut menus according to the display on the screen:

RADIO

activate/deactivate RDS
■ activate/deactivate REG mode
■ activate/deactivate radiotex1

CD/MP3 CD

■ activate/deactivate Intro
activate/deactivate track repeat (the entire current CD for CD, the entire current folder for MP3 CD)
activate/deactivate random play (the entire current CD for CD, the entire current folder for MP3 CD)

USB

activate/deactivate track repeat (of the current folder/artist/genre/playlist)
activate/deactivate random play (of the current folder/artist/genre/playlist)

08 SCREEN MENU MAP

MONOCHROME C

Pressing the MENU button displays:

AUDIO FUNCTIONS

FM BAND PREFERENCES

alternative frequencies (RDS)

activate/deactivate

regional mode (REG)

activate/deactivate

radio-text information (RDTXT)

activate/deactivate

PLAY MODES

album repeat (RPT)

activateddeactivate

track random play(RDM)

activateddeactivate

TRIP COMPUTER

ENTER DISTANCE TO DESTINATION

Distance: x miles

ALERT LOG

Diagnostics

STATUS OF THE FUNCTIONS *

Functions activated or deactivated

* The parameters vary according to vehicle.

PERSONALISATION-CONFIGURATION

DEFINE THE VEHICLE PARAMETERS *

DISPLAY CONFIGURATION

video brightness adjustment

normal video

inverse video

brightness (- +) adjustment

date and time adjustment

day/month/year adjustment

hour/minute adjustment

choice of 12 h/24 h mode

choice of units

l/100 km - mpg - km/l

Connect/Disconnect a device

Telephone function

Audio Streaming function

Consult the paired device

Delete apaired device

Perform a Bluetooth search

Call

Calls list

Directory

Manage the telephone call

Termi nate the current call

Activate private mode

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

QUESTION	ANSWER	SOLUTION
There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources (radio, CD...).	For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio, CD...).	Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle position, select the musical ambience "None" and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
The CD is fected automatically or is not played by the player.	The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not recognised by the audi o equipment.	- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the right way up.- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be play ed f it is too damaged.- Check the content in the case of a recorded CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.- The audio equipment's CD player does not play DVDs.- Due to their quality level, certain writeable CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The message "USB peripheral error" is displayed on the screen. The Bluetooth connection is cut.	The battery of the peripheral may not be sufficiently charged. Rechar	ge the battery of the peripheral device.
	The USB memory stick is not recognised.The memory stick may be corrupt.	Reformat the memory stick.
The CD player sound is poor.	The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert	good quality CDs and store them in suitable conditions.
	The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable.	Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting anambience.
QUESTION	ANSWER SOLUTIO	N
The stored stations do not function (no sound, 87.5 Mhz is displayed...).	An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the BAND A	ST button to return to the waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which the stations are stored.
The traffic announcement (TA) is displayed. I do not receive any traffic information.	The radio station is not part of the regional traffic information network. T	une to a radio station which broadcasts traffic information.
The quality of reception of the radio station listened to gradually det erio rates or the stored stations do not function (no sound, 87.5 Mhz is displayed...).	The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle is travelling.	Activate the RDS function to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area.
	The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block reception, including in RDS mode.	This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
	The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going through a car wash or into an underground car park).	Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
Sound cut-outs of 1 to 2 seconds in radio mode.	During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency permitting better reception of the station.	Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is too frequent and always on the same route.
With the engine off, the audio equipment switches off after a few minutes of use.	When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating time depends on the battery charge.The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.	Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery charge.
The message "the audi o system is overheated" appears on the display.	In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature is too high, the audio equipment switches to an automatic thermal protection mode leading to a reduction of the volume or stopping of the playing of the CD.	Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to allow the system to cool.

Accessories....213

Accessory socket, 12 volt ...102, 104, 109, 110, 114

Access to the 3rd row ....71

Adjusting headlamps .....94, 95

Adjusting head restraints 67, 69

Adjusting seat belt height....132, 133

Adjusting the steering wheel 75

Airbags 36

Airbags, curtain....138, 139

Airbags, front ....136, 139 Airbags, lateral....138, 139

Air conditioning 25

Air conditioning, digital ....59, 62

Air conditioning, manual....59, 60

Air fi Iter 177

Air flow 25

Air vents....58

Alarm 81

Anti-pinch....83, 108

Anti-theft 78

Armrest, rear 110

Assistance call 224

Audible warning 128

Audio/video sockets......254

Audio streaming (Bluetooth)....315

Automatic illumination of headlamps .....91, 94

Automatic operation of hazard warning lamps .....128

Automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers .....96, 98

Auxiliary socket....290, 312

Auxiliary sockets .....254, 310

Battery 177,206

Battery, charging .....206

Battery, remote control .....79, 80

Blind for panoramic sunroof ....108

Blinds....115

Bluetooth (hands-free)...255-257, 291, 292, 313

Bluetooth (telephone)...255-257, 291, 292

Bonnet....172

Bonnet stay....172

Boot 87

Boot lamp 101, 115

Brake discs 178

Brake lamps....197

Brake pads 178

Brakes 178

Capacity, fuel tank 89

CD MP3 289, 309

Central locking 77,86

Centre console 104

Changing a bulb ....194, 197, 198

Changing a fuse ....199

Changing a wheel .....188, 190

Changing a wiper blade....98, 208

Changing the date ....260, 294, 317

Changing the remote control battery ....79

Changing the time ...260, 294, 317

Checking levels .....176, 177

Checking the engine oil level 40

Checking tyre pressures (using the kit) 179

Checks.....174, 175, 177, 178

Child lock 127

Children 120, 124, 125

Child seats 116

Child seats,

conventional.....118,120

Closing the boot....77, 87

Closing the doors....77, 85

Cold climate screen .....212

Colour screen,

retractable....49,51,53

Concertina boards ...72, 109, 110

Connectors,

audio ...103, 104, 290, 310, 312

Control for panoramic

sunroof blind 108

Coolant level 37, 176

Coolant temperature

indicator 37

Courtesy lamps....99

Courtesy mirror .....103

Cruise control 154

Cup holder .....102, 109, 110

Date (setting) .....260, 294, 316, 317

Daytime running lamps .....93, 194, 196

Deactivating ESP ....131

Deactivating the passenger airbag....136

Deadlocking....77

Defrosting 60, 61

Demisting....60

Dials and gauges 27

Diesel additive level 177

Dimensions....221

Dipped beam .....91, 194, 195

Dipstick....40, 176

Directional lighting 95

Direction

indicators .....128, 194, 197

Distance alert....150

Doors 85

Doors emergency

control....87

Door trays 102

Dynamic emergency

braking....143

Eco-driving 25

Economical driving 25

Economy mode....208

Electric window

controls 83

Electronic engine

immobiliser....78,80

Electronic stability control

(ESC)....130

Emergency boot

release....88

Emergency call ......224, 225

Emergency warning

lamps 128

Energy economy

mode 208

Engine, Diesel .....90, 173, 175,

214, 215, 216, 217, 220

Engine, petrol 90, 174

Engine compartment .....174, 175

Engine compartment

fusebox 199

Engine oil level

indicator 40, 176

Engines....214, 216

Environment 25,80

ESC/ASR....130

ESP/ASR 131

Filling with fuel 89, 90

Fitting a wheel 192

Fitting roof bars....211

Fittings, boot .....109, 110

Flashing indicators....128

Foglamps, rear 92

Folding the rear seats ...69, 71, 72

Front foglamps.....92, 194, 196

Front seats....65, 66, 68

Fuel....25, 89, 90

Fuel consumption 25

Fuel fi ller cap 89

Fuel filler flap 89, 90

Fuel gauge....89

Fuel tank 89, 90

Fusebox, dashboard .....199

Fuses....199

G.P.S. 238, 277

Gearbox, automatic .....161, 178

Gearbox, electronic

gear control .....157, 164, 178

Gearbox,

manual....156, 164, 178

Gear effi ciency

indicator 156

Gear lever 25

Gear lever,

automatic gearbox ....161

Gear lever, electronic gear

control gearbox ....157

Gear lever,

manual gearbox ....156

Glove box 102, 103

Grab handles 102

Guidance 238,277

Guide-me-home....94

Halogen headlamps.....194

Hands-free kit .....291, 292, 313

Hazard warning lamps .....128

Head-up display.....148, 152, 154

Headlamp adjustment.....94, 95

Headlamps, directional ....95, 194

Headlamp wash 97

Headlamp wash reservoir .....176

Head restraints, front .....67

Head restraints, rear ......69

Heated seats 67

Heating 25,59,60

Height and reach adjustment,

steering wheel 75

High load retaining net.....112

Hill start assist 145

Hooks 110, 114

Horn....128

Identifi cation plates .....222

Indicator lamps, status.....30

Indicators, direction .....128

Inflating accessories

(using the kit)....179

Inflating tyres 25

Inputs for audio

system .....254, 290, 310, 312

Instrument panel lighting .....41

Instrument panels .....27, 28

Instrument panel

screen....27, 156

Intelligent Traction

Control 130

Interior fi ttings 102

Interior mood lighting .....100

ISOFIX child seats ..... 123-125

ISOFIX mountings .....123

Jack 188,190

JACK socket .....104, 310, 312

Jukebox (copy) 252

Jukebox (playing) 253

Keeping children

safe 116, 124, 125, 136

Key with remote

control 76-78, 80

Labels, identification .....222

Lamps, warning and

indicator 29, 32, 33

Level, brake fluid .....176

Level, headlamp wash .....97, 176

Level, power steering fluid .....176

Levels and checks ..... 174-177

Lighting....101

Lighting, guide-me home .....93, 94

Lighting, interior .....99, 100

Lighting bulbs

(replacement).....194, 197, 198

Lighting control stalk .....91

Lighting dimmer 41

Loading....25,73,211

Load reduction mode .....208

Load space cover .....109-111

Locating your vehicle .....77

Locking from the inside.....86

Long objects,

transporting....68,73

Luggage retaining net .....113

Main beam 91, 194-196

Maintenance 25

Map reading lamps .....99

Markings, identifi cation .....222

Mat....105

Menu, main 306

Mini fuel level 89

Mirror, rear view 75

Mirrors, door 74

Misfuel prevention .....90

Modularity, seats 73

Motorway function

(direction indicators) .....128

Mountings for ISOFIX seats ....123

MP3 CD 289, 309

Multimedia, rear .....104, 107

Music media players .....250, 288

Navigation....238, 277

Net 111

Number plate lamps .....198

Oil fi Iter 177

Oil level 40,176

Opening the bonnet .....172

Opening the boot .....76, 87

Opening the doors .....76, 85

Opening the panoramic

sunroof blind 108

Opening the retractable screen...53

Operation indicator

lamps 29, 30, 32, 34

Paint colour code ......222

Panoramic glass

sunroof....108

Parking brake 178

Parking brake,

electric 140, 143

Parking sensors,

rear 167

Parking space

sensor 169

Particle emission

fi Iter 177, 178

Passenger compartment

fi iter 177

PEUGEOT call

button....225

PEUGEOT CONNECT

ASSISTANCE 224

Peugeot Connect Media

Navigation (NG4 3D) .....28, 51,

53, 55, 227, 230,

233, 261

Peugeot Connect

Navigation (RNEG) .....49, 53,

274, 295

PEUGEOT

CONNECT SOS .....224, 225

Peugeot Connect

Sound (RD5) 46, 303,

318, 320

PEUGEOT services .....225

PIN code 258

Player, CD MP3 .....289, 309

Ols

(updated)....245

Port, USB.....104, 310, 312

Priming the fuel

system 173

Protecting children .....116, 120

123-125, 136

Puncture 179, 185

Radio 249, 287, 307

RCA sockets 254

Reading lamps, rear .....99

Rear foglamp 197, 198

Rear screen

(demisting)....61

Recharging the battery .....206

Reduction of electrical

load 208

Reinitialising the electric

windows 83

Reinitialising the remote

control 79

Remote control .....76, 77, 80

Removable screen

(snow shield) 212

Removing a wheel .....192

Removing the mat 105

Repair kit, puncture .....179, 185

Replacing bulbs .....194, 197, 198

Replacing fuses 199

Replacing the air fi Iter .....177

Replacing the oil fi Iter .....177

Replacing the particle

emission fi Iter .....178

Replacing the passenger

compartment fi iter .....177

Replacing wiper

blades 98,208

Resetting the service

indicator 39

Resetting the trip recorder .....41

Rev counter 27

Reversing lamp....197

Rigid panel....71

Risk areas

(update) 245, 284

Roof bars 211

Routine checks .....177, 178

Running out of fuel

(Diesel) 173

Safety for children....83, 120, 127

Screen.

colour 16/9 ...233, 261, 274, 295

Screen

monochrome.....306, 318, 320

Screen, monochrome C.....55

creen, multifunction (with audio

equipment) ....44, 46, 49, 51, 53

Screen, multifunction

(without audio equipment) ....42

Screen-wash reservoir.....176

Screen menu

map ......261, 295, 318, 320

Screenwash, front....97

Screenwash fluid level .....97, 176

Seat adjustment......65, 66, 69

Seat belts.....110, 132, 133, 135

Seat confi gurations .....73

Seats, electric 66

Seats, rear 69, 71, 72

Serial number, vehicle .....222

Service indicator 38

Servicing....25

Setting

the clock .....260, 294, 316, 317

Short-cut menus ....234, 275, 276

Sidelamps....91, 194-197

Side repeater 196

SIM card 103,258

Spare wheel....188, 190

Spectacles storage .....102

Speed limiter....152

Speedometer....27

Spotlamps, side 100

Stability control (ESP)....131

Starting

the vehicle .....78, 157, 161

Steering mounted controls,

audio 232, 305

Stopping

the vehicle .....78, 157, 161

Stop & Start .....57, 61, 63, 89,

164, 172, 177, 206

Storage... 102, 104, 106, 109, 110

Storage box 103

Storage drawer 106

Storage wells 109, 110

Stowing rings 109, 110

Sun visor....102, 103, 115

Synchronising

the remote control .....79

System, navigation .....238, 277

Systems, ASR and ESP .....131

Table of weights .....215, 217, 220

Tables, aircraft 106

Tables of engines......214, 216

Tables of fuses....199

Tank, fuel 90

Technical

data......214-216, 217, 220

Telephone....225, 255-257,

291, 292

Telephone, hands-free .... 255-257

Temperature, coolant .....37

Temperature control

for heated seats ......67

Temporary tyre repair kit .....179

Third brake lamp....198

TMC (Traffi c info) .....247, 285

Tools 188, 190

Torch 101, 109, 110, 115

Total distance recorder .....41

Towbar 210

Towed loads.....215, 217, 220

Towing another vehicle .....209

Traction control

(ASR)....131

Traffi c information

(TA) 248, 286, 287, 308

Traffi c information

(TMC) .....247, 248, 285, 286

Trip computer ....54, 55, 57

Trip distance recorder .....41

Tyre pressures 222

Tyres....25

Tyre under-inflation detection 129

Warning lamps ....30, 33, 34

Wash-wipe, rear 97

Weights ......215, 217, 220

Welcome lighting .....93, 100

Window controls 83

Wiper, rear 97

Wiper control stalk 96-98

Wipers 96, 98

Under-inflation

(detection)....129

Under floor storage .....114

Unlocking....76

Unlocking from

the inside 86

Update risk areas .....245, 284

Updating POIs 245

Updating

the date 260, 316, 317

Updating

the time 260, 316, 317

USB

(Peugeot Connect) .....104, 310

Xenon headlamps....194

Vehicle

identifi cation 222

Ventilation 58-60

Voice commands .....230

EXTERIOR

Remote control key....76-80

• opening/closing
• anti-theft protection
• starting
• battery

Fuel tank 89-90

Misfuel prevention 90

Wiper 96-98

Changing a wiper blade .....98,208

Boot....87-88

- opening/closing

emergency release

Temporary puncture

repair kit 179-187

Changing a wheel 188-193

tools

- removing

Parking sensors 167-168

Towing 209-210

Towbar 210-211

Changing

rear bulbs 197-198

• rear lamps
• 3rd brake lamp
  -number plate lamps
• foglamps

Side view of a light blue minivan with orange circular annotations pointing to key areas (no text or symbols present)

Accessories 213

Roof bars, finishers.... 211

Panoramic sunroof 108

Door mirrors 74

Exterior welcome lighting....93

Door mirror spotlamps .....100

Directional lighting 91-95

Headlamp height adjustment.....94, 95

Very cold climate screen....212

Changing

bulbs 194-196

• front lamps
• foglamps
• direction indicator repeaters

Parking

space sensors 169-170

Doors....85-88

- opening/closing

- central locking

- emergency control

Alarm 81-82

Electric windows 83-84

ESC:
ABS, EBA, ASR, CDS ..... 130-131
Tyre under-inflation detection ..... 129
Tyre pressures 222

INTERIOR

Side blinds 115

Boot fittings 109-115

- load space roller cover

- high load retaining net

- luggage retaining net

- hooks

-12Vaccessory socket

- storage box

Boot lamp, torch 101, 115

Rear multimedia 107

Conventional child seats..... 116-122

ISOFIX child seats .....123-126

Child lock 127

Rear seats, 2nd row .....69-70

Rigid panel....71

Access to the 3rd row .....71

Rear seats, 3rd row 72-73

Top-down view of a car interior with multiple compartments and highlighted orange zones (no text or symbols)

Aircraft style table ....106

Storage compartments

under the footwells 106

Front seats....65-67

- manual

- electric

- head restraints

-lumbar

- heated

Seat in table position,

transporting long objects 68

Airbags 136-139

Deactivating the passenger's

front airbag 117,137

Mats....105

Storage drawer 106

Seat belts....132-135

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Sun visor....103

Dashboard fuses 199-202

Opening the bonnet 172

Interior

fi ttings 102-103, 105

• sun visor
  -driver's storage compartments
• glove box
• mat

12 V accessory socket....104

Courtesy lamps....99, 100

Seat belt/passenger's front airbag warning lamps display ..... 133, 137

Rear view mirror 75

Interior view of a car dashboard with orange circular annotations highlighting specific components (no text or symbols present)

Centre console 104

Peugeot Connect USB .... 112, 288, 310

Peugeot Connect Media navigation (RT6) .....227-270 Setting the date/time ..... 260

Peugeot Connect Navigation (RNEG)....271-302 Setting the date/time ... 294

Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5) .....303-324 Setting the date/time...316, 317

Ventilation 58-59
Rear ventilation....59
Manual air conditioning....60-61
Digital air conditioning ....62-64
Demist/defrost 61

6-speed manual gearbox .....156

Gear effi ciency indicator .....156

Electronic gear control

gearbox 157-160

Automatic

gearbox....161-163

Stop & Start 164-166

Hill start assist 145

Eco-driving....25-26

Electric parking

brake 140-144, 146-147

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (CONTINUED)

Multifunction screens ....42-52

- Screen A

- Screen C

- 16/9 colour screen

- 16/9 high definition colour screen

Retractable

screen 53

Screen A:

setting the date/time 43,45

Lighting controls .....91-95

Direction indicators 128

Hazard warning lamps 128

Head-up display....148-149

Distance alert....150-151

Speed limiter....152-153

Cruise control 154-155

Panoramic sunroof 108

Instrument panels,

screens 27-29

Warning lamps 29-37

Indicators 37-40

Gear effi ciency indicator .....156

Buttons 39,41

check/service indicator/trip

distance recorder

- lighting dimmer

Interior view of a car dashboard with orange circular annotations highlighting key components (no text or symbols present)

Head-up display....148-149

Distance alert.....150-151

Wiper controls....96-98

Trip computer 54-57

Ignition switch 78

Door mirrors 74

Electric windows, deactivating ....83-84

Switch panel 16

Stop & Start 164-166

Headlamp height adjustment.....94, 95

Steering wheel adjustment .....75

Horn....128

TECHNICAL DATA - MAINTENANCE

Running out of fuel, Diesel .....173

Checking levels .....176-177

- oil

- brake fluid

- power steering fluid

- coolant

- screenwash/headlamp wash fluid

Checking components .....177-178

- air filter

- passenger compartment filter

- oil filter

- brake pads/discs

Changing bulbs....194-198

- front

- rear

12 V battery ......206-207

Load reduction, economy mode ... 208

Engine compartment

fuses 199,203-205

Top-down view of a car interior with highlighted components and no visible text or symbols

Petrol weights 215

Diesel weights 217-219

Diesel weights - LCV 220

Diagram of a light blue compact car with labeled dimensions A, B and orange circular markers indicating features.

Identification markings......222

Opening the bonnet 172

Under the bonnet, petrol 174

Under the bonnet, Diesel 175

Petrol engines....214

Diesel engines 216

Dimensions....221

This handbook describes all of the equipment available in the whole range.

Your vehicle will be fitted with some of this equipment described in this document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification for the country in which it is sold.

The descriptions and illustrations are given without any obligation. Automobiles PEUGEOT reserves the right to modify the technical specifications, equipment and accessories without having to update the current handbook.

This document is an integral part of your vehicle. It should be passed on to the new user in the event of sale or transfer.

Automobiles PEUGEOT declares, by application of the provisions of the European regulation (Directive 2000/53) relating to End of Life Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by this regulation and that recycled materials are used in the manufacture of the products that it sells.

Reproduction or translation of all or part of this handbook is prohibited without written authorisation from Automobiles PEUGEOT.

For any work on your vehicle, use a qualified workshop that has the technical information, competence and equipment required, which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide.

Printed in the EU

Anglais

05-11